SQM PDF

Supplier Quality Manual
HATC
Revise No. Revise Date Effective Date
03 1 Jul 2014 1 Apr 2015
Confirmed
Issued By Checked By Reviewed By Verified By Approved By
By
Saichon S. Narith P. Adul K. Suzuki Y. Sanbonmatsu T. Murai H.
Control Document 20 year in electronic file QMPFR-S0804-001 Rev.00

Control Document 20 year in electronic file QMPFR-S0804-001 Rev.00
July 1, 2014
This English translation is for reference purposes

only and the wording in the Japanese language
prevails in case of any discrepancy.
Table of Contents
July 1, 2014
Table of Contents
1 Preface
1-1 Structure of SQM
1-2 Production Process Image
1-3 SQM Outline
2 General
2-1 Important Safety Parts
2-2 Regulatory Compliance Certification
2-3 Designation of Quality Representative
2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance
2-5 Control of Honda-Owned Property
2-6 Control of Supply Parts
2-7 Supplier Quality Evaluation
2-7-1 Delivery Quality Evaluation
2-7-2 Supplier Quality Audit
2-8 Contaminants Control
2-9 Control of Quality Records
3 Pre-Production Stage
3-1 Stage Management
3-2 Process Design
3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table
3-3 Delivery Packaging
3-4 Countermeasure at Pre-production Stage
3-5 Quality Standards
3-5-1 Parts Inspection
3-5-2 Preparation of Limit Samples
3-5-3 Grain and Color Adjustment
3-6 Control of Monitoring and Measuring Devices
3-7 Operation Control Documents
3-8 Delivery of Parts
3-9 Transition to Mass Production
3-9-1 Validity Testing
4 Mass Production Stage

4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control
4-2 Mass Production Quality Control
4-3 Identification and Traceability
4-4 Change Point Control
4-5 Corrective Action Report
4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem
4-5-2 Market Quality Problem
4-6 Specification Change
4-6-1 Countermeasure Request Form
Honda Motor Co., ltd.

2/3
Table of Contents
July 1, 2014
5 Reference
5-1 Process Capability
5-2 Error Proofing
5-3 Control Chart
5-4 5 Principals for Problem Solving
5-5 Process FMEA
6 Supplement
6-1 Glossary of Terms and Definitions
6-2 Honda Contacts Conversion Table
6-3 Proposal for SQM Revision
6-4 Master List

3/3
1 Preface
July 1, 2014
1 Preface
Purpose: This manual is referred to as Supplier Quality Manual (herein after referred to as SQM) and is
supplemental to the “General Agreement for Purchase of Parts” and the” General Agreement for
Quality Assurance, to establish a process of providing high quality that satisfies and exceeds the
expectations of Honda product users.
Scope: SQM is applied to all parts ordered by Honda under the General Agreement for Purchase of
Parts. The scope of SQM includes all quality assurance activities performed by suppliers to ensure
the appropriate quality of delivered parts. However, where the application of SQM is not practical,
exemption may be accepted by specifying operations to which the SQM is not applicable and
reasons for the exclusion.
Roles of SQM: This manual is a part of the quality control manual set forth in the “General Agreement for
Quality Assurance” entered into and concluded between Honda and suppliers, and designed with a
view to provide supplemental information in order for parts and suppliers quality assurance activities
to confirm to the respective provisions of the “General Agreement for Purchase of Parts” and the
“General Agreement for Quality Assurance”. Suppliers are required to comply with each of the
requirements specified in the “General Agreement for Quality Assurance” with SQM as guidance on
practice of quality assurance.
Confidentiality: Honda and suppliers agree to take the same care to preserve the confidentiality of each
other's confidential information and will not disclose such information to any third party without the
prior permission of the other party.
SQM is copyrighted by Honda. All printed or downloaded contents of SQM via online by suppliers
are maintained and stored in a safe and controlled manner. Suppliers may make photocopies of
sections and pages of SQM for the purpose of training use or as reference, however please
exercise proper custody and control in a manner that such downloads and printouts are constantly
updated to the latest.
SQM contains confidential and proprietary information of Honda, and as a general rule, it will not be
disclosed to any individual or organization other than those who are suppliers without prior written
approval of Honda. However, if it required to perform operations and tasks, such as dissemination to
second and sub-suppliers, the information may be shared under the sole responsibility of the
disclosing suppler by identifying the person responsible for the control and by exercising appropriate
discretion and confidentiality of the information.
Public Quality Standards: Although the effectiveness of quality standards such as ISO 9000 series and
ISO/TS 16949, and environmental standards such as ISO14000 is recognized, third party
registration to these standards by an accredited third party certification body is not required.
Revision: Honda may revise or update SQM as necessary. Honda notifies suppliers of such revision or
update of SQM, and it takes effect after a grace period specified at the time of notification of the
revision or update.
Suppliers may request Honda for disclosure of obsolete versions of SQM.
Revision proposal: We would appreciate if you could forward your comments or suggestions for
improvement to SQM, please complete the form attached in “SQM 6-3 SQM Revision Proposal” and
contact below by IMPACT III or e-mail:
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Technical Division
Global Quality & Compliance Audit Division, Quality System Standardization Department

1/1
October 1, 2008

3-2 Process Design -1 Process Quality Control Table
Pre-Production Stage
3-4 C/M at Pre-Production Stage -1 Parts Inspection
General
3-5 Quality Standards -2 Preparation of Limit Samples

3-6 Control of Monitoring & Measuring Devices -3 Grain and Color Adjustment
-1 Delivery Quality Evaluation 3-7 Operation Control Documents
-2 Supplier Quality Audit
3-9 Transition to Mass Production -1 Validity Testing

Mass Production Stage

5-2 Error Proofing
Reference

5-3 Control Chart
5-4 5 Principles for Problem Solving -1 Delivery Quality Problem
5-5 Process FMEA -2 Market Quality Problem
4-6 Specification Change -1 Countermeasure Request Form

1/1
October 1, 2008

Prototype Stage Pre-Production Stage Mass Production Stage
Final
Prototype Prototype 　MP DWG ◆ MP Go ◆Determine capability
Timing DWG DWG
D
Kaku
QC 　VC 　MP
Stage Ⅱ Ⅲ Ⅳ Ⅴ Ⅵ
3-2 Process Design　-1 Process Quality Control Table
3-3 Delivery Packaging 4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control
3-4 C/M at Preproduction Stage 4-2 Mass Production Quality Control
3-5 Qlty Std -1 Inspection Criteria for Parts 4-3 Identification &Traceability
-2 Preparation of Limit Samples
-3 Grain and Color Adjustment 4-4 Change Point Control
Supplier
3-6 Control of Monitoring and Measuring Devices 4-5 Corrective Action Report
-1 Delivery Quality Prolem
3-7 Operation Control Documents -2 Market Quality Problem
3-9 Transition to MP
-1 Validity Testing
　-1 C/M Request Form
2-1 Important Safety Parts 2-6 Control of Supply Parts 5-1 Process Capability
Reference
General
2-2 Regulatory Compliance Certification 2-7 Supplier Quality Evaluation 5-2 Error Proofing
2-3 Designation of Quality Representative 　-1 Delivery Quality Evaluation 5-2 Control Chart
2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance 　-2 Supplier Quality Audit 5-4 5 Principals for Problem Solving
2-5 Control of Honda-Owned Property 2-8 Contaminants Control 5-5 Process FMEA
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

1/1
1-3 SQM Outline
February 1, 2013
1-3 SQM Outline
No. Document Title Overview

1 Preface Outline the purpose, scope, system, and image, etc. of production
process.
2 General
2-1 Important Safety 1) Honda specifies important safety parts with drawings
Parts (specifications included).
2) Suppliers recognize “important safety parts” designated by
Honda, become familiar with the definition of HS, HA, and HB,
and control them as critical items.
2-2 Regulatory 1) Honda shall specify laws and regulations that suppliers must
Compliance comply with in a manner that all parts constituting a product
Certification meet the respective regulatory requirements.
2) The suppliers shall ensure that the products fully comply with
any applicable laws and regulations as requested by Honda.
2-3 Designation of 1) Honda shall inform a supplier’s quality contact of matters
Quality Contact relating to the quality (Quality Assurance Representative and
Facility Quality Representative).
2) The supplier shall resister its quality contact to Honda in order
for communication with Honda about quality to be effective.
2-4 Sub-Supplier 1) Honda shall identify and outline the scope of activities of
Quality sub-suppliers for which a supplier assume sole responsibility.
Assurance 2) The supplier shall establish basic requirements for quality
assurance of purchased parts and outsourced processes in
order for the quality of parts to be properly controlled by its
sub-suppliers.
2-5 Control of 1) Honda shall, where necessary, lend suppliers machines, dies,
Honda-Owned jigs and tools, etc., necessary to manufacture parts.
Properties 2) The supplier shall take over the control method of Honda to
properly control machines, dies, jigs and tools, etc., necessary
to manufacture parts.
2-6 Control of Supply 1) When Honda provides component parts to a supplier on
Parts consignment, Honda shall control quality of the supply parts by
clarifying roles and responsibilities of supply parts users, supply
parts suppliers, and Honda.
2) The supply parts user shall assure the quality of parts of own in
accordance with the roles and responsibilities defined by
Honda.
3) The supply parts supplier shall assure supply parts in
accordance with the roles and responsibilities defined by
Honda.
2-7 Supplier Quality 1) Honda shall communicate the purpose and viewpoints of quality
Evaluation assessment to suppliers.
2) The supplier shall become familiar with requirements of Honda
and take appropriate actions.
2-7-1 Delivery Quality 1) Honda shall inform suppliers of the results of delivery quality
Evaluation performance (including supply parts).
2) The supplier shall monitor the results of performance, verify
attainment of the target, and continuously improve the delivery
quality.

1/5
1-3 SQM Outline
February 1, 2013

2-7-2 Supplier Quality 1) Honda shall conduct quality audits of suppliers’ sites.
Audit 2) The supplier shall participate in the quality audit and take
appropriate actions with respect to the findings identified.
2-8 Contaminants 1) Honda shall define the requirements to properly exercise the
Control control of contaminants.
2) The supplier shall define control items, points, etc. for parts
subject to contaminants control and maintain satisfactory
condition conforming to contaminants control criteria.
2-9 Control of Quality 1) Honda shall identify quality records which Honda may require
Records suppliers for presentation.
2) The supplier shall retain quality records, when so designated in
SQM in accordance with requirements established by Honda.
3 Pre-production Stage
3-1 Stage 1) Honda shall designate key control parts, and verify production
Management preparation activities of a supplier for the key control parts.
2) The supplier shall plan production preparation activities to be
linked to the Pre-production schedule of Honda. Items to
complete at each stage of pre-production shall be defined in
order for the supplier to thoroughly implement the planned
activities.
3-2 Process Design 1) Honda shall define the requirements for suppliers to design a
process.
2) The supplier shall clarify requirements for designing a process,
and maintain the manufacturing process at an appropriate
quality level.
3-2-1 Process Quality 1) Honda shall define contents and provide operation procedure
Control Table for process quality control table.
2) The supplier shall control and maintain the process quality
control table and use for the following purposes.
a) Management of control items for in-process quality
assurance.
b) Monitoring of process control conditions.
c) Accumulation and conveyance of skills and technology, etc.
3-3 Delivery 1) Honda shall examine and agree the proposed packaging style
Packaging for delivery of parts.
2) The supplier shall determine and obtain agreement from Honda
on packaging style for delivery of parts, and preserve the
conformity of product during handling, delivery, and storage
from the time of shipment from the supplier to the time of use by
Honda.
3-4 Countermeasure 1) Honda shall require suppliers of problem parts, which were
at Pre-production found in the pre-production stage and its cause was considered
Stage attributable to the supplier, to conduct analysis and take
countermeasure against the cause.
2) The supplier shall conduct analysis and take countermeasure
for the cause of the problem in accordance with a request from
Honda and report the results to Honda. For problems in the
pre-production stage, it is important that measures for the
problem be preferentially implemented and results be evaluated
for effectiveness by the subsequent pre-production trial event.

2/5
1-3 SQM Outline
February 1, 2013

3-5-1 Inspection Criteria 1) Honda shall issue Parts Inspection Criteria to suppliers to verify
for Parts quality characteristics of parts to which verification is mandated
by laws and regulations.
2) The supplier shall report inspection results with respect to the
quality characteristics of parts specified in Parts Inspection
Criteria.
3-5-2 Preparation of 1) Honda shall, if a supplier produces limit samples of parts for
Limit Samples which acceptability is determined by visual inspection, etc.,
examine and approve such samples.
2) The supplier shall control limit samples approved by Honda, and
judge the acceptability of manufactured parts for quality.
3-5-3 Grain and Color 1) Honda may coordinate and build consensus with suppliers on
Adjustment the specification of textures of grain and color that cannot be
specified on the drawing (specifications included).
2) The supplier shall clarify requirements to be coordinated in
response to a request from Honda for textures of grain and
color, of parts.
3-6 Control of 1) Honda shall provide basic requirements for measuring and
Monitoring and monitoring equipment for suppliers to use.
Measuring 2) The supplier shall define installation and control methods of
Devices measuring and monitoring equipment in accordance with the
requirements specified by Honda to assure the results of
measuring and monitoring of parts delivered to Honda.
3-7 Operation Control 1) Honda shall provide suppliers with requirements of operation
Documents control documents, which the suppliers make available to their
operators, in order for the suppliers’ manufacturing processes to
be in a controlled state.
2) The supplier shall formulate operation control documents in
accordance with requirements prescribed by Honda, provide to
its operators and utilize for training.
3-8 Parts Delivery 1) Honda shall present suppliers with requirements for handling,
transportation and storage, etc., of parts when delivering from
suppliers to Honda.
2) The supplier shall define basic requirements for handling,
transportation and storage of parts in accordance with the
requirements set by Honda and preserve the conformity of
product.
3-9 Transition to 1) Honda shall present suppliers with evaluation items for verifying
Mass Production transition to mass production. Honda may attend selected
suppliers’ evaluation events.
2) The supplier shall verify completion of pre-production stage and
issue a Mass Production Transition Declaration, and enter into
mass production stage.
3-9-1 Validity Testing 1) Honda shall, considering the level of importance, novelty, etc.,
select critical control parts for which suppliers are required to
report results of validity testing.
2) The supplier shall draw up an implementation plan for validity
testing to prove the conformity of parts to applicable drawings
(specifications included), etc., and complete all testing prior to
mass production startup.

3/5
1-3 SQM Outline
February 1, 2013

4-1 Early Mass 1) Honda shall provide a verification method for process capability
Production and mass productivity, which Honda requires suppliers during
Quality Control early stage of mass production.
2) The supplier shall perform verifications of process capability and
mass productivity in accordance with requirements prescribed
by Honda during the early stage of mass production. The
verification results shall be presented to Honda if so requested.
4-2 Mass Production 1) Honda shall present suppliers with requirements to continuously
Quality Control maintain and improve the quality control system developed
during pre-production stage, which includes change point
control in the mass production stage.
2) The supplier shall, for all changes to be made to operator,
manufacturing process, manufacturing method and/or parts,
continuously maintain and improve the state of manufacturing
process control in accordance with the method employed for the
pre-production stage.
4-3 Identification and 1) Honda shall provide requirements for identification and
Traceability traceability control, which is to verify necessary information
immediately, determine the cause and scope of parts affected,
and take prompt countermeasures in the event that
nonconformity occurs at a supplier’s production stage or after
shipment.
2) The supplier shall identify parts in accordance with requirements
prescribed by Honda, and control traceability.
4-4 Change Point 1) Honda shall provide requirements to control all change points
Control with respect to labor, manufacturing process, manufacturing
method, and parts during a supplier’s production process.
2) The supplier shall maintain traceability of all change points in
accordance with requirements prescribed by Honda.
4-5 Corrective Action 1) Honda shall provide requirements for reporting of corrective
Report action in cases where nonconformity occurs in quality of parts
made by suppliers.
2) The supplier shall report corrective actions in accordance with
requirements prescribed by Honda.
4-5-1 Delivery Quality 1) Honda shall provide requirements for the handling of delivery
Problem quality problem in the case where nonconformity is found in
parts delivered from a supplier to Honda or to a delivery
destination specified by Honda.
2) The supplier shall, in accordance with requirements prescribed
by Honda, define procedures to eliminate nonconforming parts
from Honda, and prevent nonconforming parts from being
flowed out to the market.
4-5-2 Market Quality 1) Honda shall, where problem occurs in the market after products
Problem are sold, and where the problem is deemed attributable to the
supplier from which the concerned parts were purchased,
request the supplier to perform analysis of the problem and to
take preventive measures against recurrence.
2) The supplier shall analyze market problems required by Honda,
and if it is attributable to its own conduct, take measures to
prevent the problem from recurring.

4/5
1-3 SQM Outline
February 1, 2013

4-6 Specification 1) Honda shall provide requirements to ensure a smooth
Change implementation of the specification change issued by Honda to
suppliers.
2) The supplier shall establish procedures to process specification
changes to parts in accordance with the requirements of Honda.
4-6-1 Countermeasure 1) Honda shall provide suppers with procedure for requesting a
Request Form specification change.
2) The supplier shall request Honda for a specification change
while identifying the need for specification change.
5 Reference
5-1 Process This manual is to provide basic concepts and points to consider for
Capability evaluating process capability to prove that a manufacturing process
has the ability to consistently achieve intended quality levels, and
for taking actions to the outcome of such evaluation.
5-2 Error Proofing This manual is to provide points to consider when employing error
proofing methods to detect abnormalities in manufacturing and
inspection processes and to prevent outflow of nonconformity.
5-3 Control Chart This manual is to explain the concept of control chart and provide
entry method to record data into the chart. Control chart shall be
used to continually improve the quality of products and the
effectiveness of quality management systems.
5-4 5 Principals for This manual is to provide the concept of “5 Principles for Problem
Problem Solving Solving”, which is used by suppliers to investigate and eliminate the
root cause of nonconformity of parts and of quality management
system.
5-5 Process FMEA This manual explains the concept of and procedures for Process
FMEA, and provides and provides entry method for the Process
Design FMEA worksheet.

5/5
July 1, 2014
2 General
1 Overview
1) Honda specifies important safety parts with drawings (specifications included).
2) Suppliers recognize “important safety parts” designated by Honda, become familiar with
the definition of HS, HA, and HB, and control them as critical items.
2 Definitions
The definitions of terms used in this manual are as follows. Refer to【SQM 6-1 Glossary of
Terms and Definitions 】for other terms.
No. Term Definition

Important safety
1 Important safety parts set forth in HES A 3050.
parts
important quality
2 Important quality characteristics set forth in HES A 3051.
characteristics
3 Requirements
The supplier shall confirm special characteristics, which are specifically selected from
important safety parts and important quality characteristics（○ Q ）, and exercise control in
accordance with section 3.2.
3.1 Review of specification
The supplier shall confirm important safety parts and important quality characteristics
（○ Q ）designated by Honda in accordance with respective drawings (specifications
included).
Part rank varies by product type, such as motorcycle, automobile, or power product. The
same parts with identical function may be given different designation depending on the
product type. If providing the same parts for different products, the supplier shall confirm
the designation for each product.
3.2 Implementation of special control

The supplier shall implement a thorough for important safety parts and important quality
characteristics（○ Q ）, the supplier shall implement a thorough maintenance and control of
quality characteristics as follows in addition to regular quality assurance activities.
3.2.1 Process Control for Important Safety Parts ( refer to 【SQM 3-2 Process Design】
and 【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table 】).
The supplier shall place marks specified by Honda (HS, HA or HB) on the process
quality control table.
The supplier shall include all quality characteristics related to important safety parts
in the process quality control table, and control processes related to the
Honda-designated important quality characteristics（○ Q ）by designating them as key
items.
3.2.2 Dissemination of Important Quality Characteristics （○ Q ）(refer to【SQM 3-2-1
Process Quality Control Table】and 【SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents】)

The supplier shall identify process control documents including process quality
control table, operation control documents, etc., with the Honda’s symbol （○ Q ） or
the supplier’s equivalent symbol or notation. The supplier shall identify those
process steps that affect special characteristics （ ○ Q ） , and raise associates’

1/3
July 1, 2014
awareness of quality.
3.2.3 Lot Control (refer to【SQM 4-3 Identification and Traceability】)
The supplier shall practice lot control for important safety parts and maintain records
in a manner that manufacturing history and release history correspond to the
identification of lots. With this procedure, the supplier shall excise control that the
scope of affected lots is identified and kept to a minimum in the event of
non-conformity.
3.2.4 Assurance of process capability

The supplier shall perform verification of process capability to confirm if important
quality characteristics （ ○ Q ） of important safety parts are controllable by
manufacturing conditions. For the verification of process capability, a set of data with
a sample size of n=100 or more is advisable. A minimum of 30 data sets should be
used (however, if the quality characteristics requires destructive inspection, or can
be assured by molds, then this may not apply) and at least one of the following
requirements must be satisfied.
a) Cpk≧1.33 or P＜0.01 is observed
b) If the process capability does not satisfy the condition above (a), conduct 100
percent inspection, and take appropriate actions in order for the process to gain
the same level of assurance.
Note: for a single specification limit case, Cp control shall apply.
※Besides important safety parts’ important quality characteristics（○ Q ）,refer to
【SQM 5-1 process function】 to carry out process function verification.

Refer to the following requirements for the timing and handling of the verification.
【SQM 2-4 Sub-supplier quality assurance】
【SQM 3-1 Stage Control】
【SQM 3-2 Process Design】
【SQM 3-9 Transition to Mass Production】
【SQM 4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control】
3.2.5 Control of Repair Parts (refer to 【SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem】)
The quality assurance representative of the supplier or the quality representative of
the facility shall approve repairs of important quality characteristics（○
Q ） of important
safety parts. The supplier shall conduct a100 percent inspection of repaired parts,
and maintain records identifying the lot.
3.2.6 Operator Training
The supplier shall provide training to its personnel on the process which involves
important safety parts and important quality characteristics（○ Q ）, and subsequently
assign personnel who possess sufficient knowledge and skills to the respective
process.
3.2.7 Use of Sub-Suppliers (refer to【SQM 2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance】)
The supplier shall, if using its sub-suppliers with respect to important safety parts,
assume responsibility for and exercise control of sub-suppliers in a manner that
ensures requirements described in this manual are thoroughly implemented at the
supplier’s responsibility.
4 Key Points
1) When providing support on important safety parts to companies related, ensure that the
supplier’s know how is adequately transferred.
2) Wherever possible, check multiple times for assembly processes that could contribute to
serious malfunctions (e.g. cotter pin insertion, etc.).
3) Check if recurrence prevention measures are in place for both hardware and software for
work involves important safety parts (e.g. bolt fastening for critical part installation).

2/3
July 1, 2014
5 Reference Materials
1) SQM 2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance
2) SQM 3-1 Stage Control
3) SQM 3-2 Process Design
4) SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table
5) SQM 3-7 Operations Control Documents
6) SQM 3-9 Transition to Mass Production
7) SQM 4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control
8) SQM 4-3 Identification and Traceability
9) SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem
10) SQM 5-1 Process Capability
11) SQM 6-1 Glossary of Terms and Definitions
12) HES A 3050 “Designation for Important Safety Parts”
13) HES A 3051 “Designation for Important Quality Characteristics”

3/3
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall specify laws and regulations that suppliers must comply with in a manner
that all parts constituting a product meet the respective regulatory requirements.
2) The suppliers shall ensure that the products fully comply with any applicable laws and
regulations as requested by Honda.
2 Definition
No. Term Definition
A course of action by the quality assurance representative,
Declaration of
facility quality representative, or responsible person who was
compliance with
1 appointed and entrusted by the quality assurance person of a
regulatory
supplier to verify that the specifications of parts designed by the
requirements
supplier comply with regulatory requirements.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall assure that all parts coming into Honda conform to requirements that define
the structure, function, and performance of parts with respect to safety and environment.
For chemical substances, the supplier shall, on its own responsibility, assure all parts to
comply with the requirements of Honda.
3.1 Compliance with Regulatory Requirements (excluding those relating to chemical
substances)
3.1.1 Confirmation of Application
The supplier shall validate regulatory requirements to be applied with drawings
(specifications included).
In addition to the information provided by Honda, collect all regulatory information
about safety and environment for the parts from government agencies, affiliated
companies overseas and external organizations concerned, and validate compliance
of parts coming into Honda with respective regulations.
3.1.2 Dissemination of regulatory requirements
The supplier shall confirm regulatory requirements for parts and for sub-suppliers
who supply parts to the supplier, if necessary, inform the respective suppliers of such
regulatory requirements, etc.
3.1.3 Promotion of Regulatory Compliance
The supplier shall determine appropriate responses to regulatory information
applicable to parts, and implement necessary measures as follows to ensure
compliance with regulatory requirements.
1) Assure regulatory compliance of parts designed and developed by its own and
obtain regulatory approval of such parts (present or submit an acquisition plan
for regulatory approval, if Honda requests).
2) Declare compliance with regulations (present or submit a compliance report and
certification, if Honda requests).
3) Communicate with Honda any information about changes resulted from a
decision that there would be an effect on the acquisition plan, compliance report,
or certificate that had already been acquired.
4) Improve manufacturing methods, inspection methods and quality control
systems.
5) Install facilities and inspection equipment.

1/2
July 1, 2014
3.1.4 Verification of Management for Regulatory Compliance

The suppliers shall verify its management of the compliance of parts with regulatory
requirements, and confirm that all regulatory requirements are met. Maintain records
in a manner that the result of verification is retrievable upon request by Honda.
3.2 Management of Chemical Substances (including actions for compliance with related laws
and regulations).
3.2.1 Requirements for Chemical Substances
The supplier shall, based on symbols for chemical substances (NH, HR, etc.)
specified on the drawing (specifications included), find the corresponding guideline
provided in “Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard”.
Chemical Substance Information Display on Drawing
Automobile: accords with HES A 3060 “Indication Methods Conforming to
Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard (Automobiles)”.
Motorcycle and Power Equipment: accord with HES A 3065“Indication Methods
Conforming to Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard (Motorcycles
and Power Products)”.
3.2.2 Control of Chemical Substances
The supplier shall refer to the most current edition of Honda Chemical Substance
Management Standard provided by Honda and have knowledge of the maximum
allowable concentrations of chemical substance (chemicals that fall under 3
categories of Honda chemical substance classification; P, DI, and DII) for all parts
that compose a Honda product, including parts to be purchased from sub-suppliers.
For all substances specifically designated as prohibited substances, (P) under the
Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard, the supplier shall assure
compliance of the substance with specified standards set forth in Honda Chemical
Substance Management Standard.
3.2.3 Collection and Submission of Data
Upon request by Honda, the supplier shall submit data to Honda based on “Honda
Chemical Substances/Recycle Data Collection Operation Manual” provided by
Honda.
Upon request from Honda with respect to submission of data on a chemical
substance content rate, the supplier shall perform its own analysis of the parts being
supplied to Honda and submit the result of such analysis.
4 Control of Records
No. Type of Record Retention Period
Verification result of regulatory
1 15 years
compliance management
Data of chemical substances/ recycling of
15 years after discontinuation of
2 chemicals presented or submitted to
production.
Honda
2) Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard
3) Indication Methods Conforming to Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard
(automobiles)
4) Indication Methods Conforming to Honda Chemical Substance Management Standard
(motorcycles and power products)
5) Honda Chemical Substances/Recycle Data Collection Operation Manual

2/2
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall inform a supplier’s quality contact of matters relating to the quality (Quality
Assurance Representative and Facility Quality Representative).
2) The supplier shall resister its quality contact to Honda in order for communication with
Honda about quality to be effective.
2 Definitions
The definitions of terms used in this manual are described in【SQM 6-1 Glossary of Terms
and Definitions】.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall designate contacts for quality assurance to manage quality related
operations with Honda to facilitate thorough communication with Honda.
3.1 Designation of Quality Contact
The supplier shall designate qualified personnel to act as a contact to Honda for the
following duties in accordance with roles and tasks.
3.1.1 Quality Assurance Representative (executive officer level)
The supplier’s person responsible for implementation of company-wide quality
assurance activities.
Assume responsibility for the following as the representative for the supplier’s
quality.
1) Attends seminars on quality for suppliers organized by Honda.
2) Follows if Honda requests a corporate-level quality improvement.
3) Receives SQM issued by Honda and deploy its requirements throughout the
company.
4) Represents the supplier and participates in regular audits (QAV-1) for supplier
quality by Honda.
5) Serves as the contact person to Honda for a corporate-level communication or
when Honda makes corporate-level requests to the suppler.
3.1.2 Facility Quality Representative (head of a factory or general manager level officials)
A supplier’s personnel who is appointed per facility and responsible for quality
assurance activities at own facility. Entrusted by the quality assurance representative
and is responsible for deploying the latest version of SQM issued by Honda and
putting it into practice at all departments concerned of the facility.
3.2 Designation of Quality Contact
3.2.1 Initial Registration
The supplier shall submit to Honda the form “Quality Assurance Representative
Notification Form” provided in section 6 of this manual in an electronic data file.
3.2.2 Change of Contact Person or Information on the “Quality Assurance
Representative Notification Form.”
In the event of a contact person change or a change to the information provided on
“Quality Assurance Representative Notification Form”, the supplier shall immediately
inform Honda of the change, make necessary changes to the “Quality Assurance
Representative Notification Form”, and reports to Honda in the form of electronic
data file.

1/4
July 1, 2014
5 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
Purchasing
Establish relationships with Cost
new suppliers
General Agreement for General Agreement for
Initial Registration
Designate Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Purchase of Parts

Representative &
Facility Quality Representative SQM
Quality Assurance
Representative
Notification Form
Register Quality Assurance Purchasing

Representative & Planning
Facility Quality
If there are changes
Representative
If any changes needed

2/4
July 1, 2014
6 Forms
6.1 Quality Assurance Representative Notification Form (blank)
Report communication route CODE
Supplier⇒Purchasing- Cost⇒※(The management block person in Company Name:
charge)⇒The QD Operations Block person in charge
Prepared by: Name, dept/job title
E-mail:
Quality Assurance Representative

Notification Form
Reason for reporting
Quality Assurance Mgr
As of　　/　　/　　　　, Facility Qlty Mgr ・Qlty Assurance System
New registration
Information update
Quality Assurance Rep.
Incumbent New
Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address
Name Title Name Title
Phone: Fax:
E-mail:
C M S K C T
s s s s S s
Facility Quality Rep. s s s s s
Facility Name Title Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address C M S K CS T
Quality Assurance System

3/4
July 1, 2014
6.2 Quality Assurance Representative Notification Form (Entry procedure)

Report communication route CODE Apr. 1, 2013
Supplier⇒Purchasing- Cost ⇒※(The management block person in ○○○○ Company Name: Honda Co.,Ltd.
charge)⇒The QD Operations Block person in charge
Prepared by: Name, dept/job title
Enter your company's reg. no↑ Jirou_Honda
＊Use single-width characters. E-mail:Jirou_Honda@hm.honda.co.jp
※↑*Enter the email address of the person filling out this form.
Quality Assurance Representative

Notification Form
Reason for reporting ＊Please put a circle( ○ ) in the appropriate box.
○ Quality Assurance Mgr
As of DD/MM/YYYY, Facility Qlty Mgr ・Qlty Assurance System
New registration Check this if there is no change to the information and
Information update ← only the date of issuance is changed.
Quality Assurance Rep. ↓※When there is not a change, the supplier has you fill out a current column, and, please make the new column a blank.
Incumbent New
Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address
Name Title Name Title
Gen. Manager, 4630 Shimotakanezawa,Haga-machi,Haga-gun,Tochigi-ken 321-3393
Ichiro Taro Executive
Dept of Quality Phone: 028-677-7014 Fax: 028-677-7050
Honda Assurance Honda Director
E-mail: Taro_Honda@hm.honda.co.jp
C M S K C T
s s s s S s
Facility Quality Rep. ※Fill in the blanks below even if no change s s s s s
Facility Name Title Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address C M S K CS T

1500 Hirakawa, Otsu, Kikuike, Kumamoto 869-1293
Ichiro Factory Fill in the blanks even if
Kss Phone: 096-293-1111 Fax: 096-293-8280 "Quality○ Assurance Rep."
Kumamoto Manager
E-mail: Ichiro_Kumamoto@hm.honda.co.jp doubles as "Facility Qlty Rep".
1907 Hirata, Suzuka, Mie 513-8666 Put a circle in the column of
Ichiro Factory the destination of delivery
Sss Phone: 0593-78-1212 Fax: 0593-78-6379 ○ from
○ C.M.S.K.CS.T
Suzuka Manager
E-mail:Ichiro_Suzuka@hm.honda.co.jp
1-13-1 Aoihigashi, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka 433-8501
John Factory
Mss Phone: 053-439-2111 Fax: 053-439-2550 ○
Hamamatsu Manager
E-mail: Ichiro_Hamamatsu@hm.honda.co.jp
1-10-1 Shinsayama, Sayama, Saitama 350-1392
Ichiro Factory
Css Phone: 042-953-4111 Fax: 042-953-3362 ○ ○
Saitama Manager
E-mail: Ichiro_Saitama@hm.honda.co.jp
2900 Kamitakanezawa,Takanezawa,Tochigi 329-1224
Ichiro Factory
Tss Phone: 028-687-2300 Fax: 028-687-2330 ○
Tachigi Manager
E-mail: Ichiro_Tochigi@hm.honda.co.jp
Quality Assurance System
Kss Qlty Div. Jiro Kumamoto, Mgr

Ichiro Kumamoto, Plant Mgr
Attach a separate sheet if unable Qlty Div. Jiro Suzuka, Mgr
to fill in here.
Sss Eng Qlty Div. Saburo Suzuka, Mgr
Ichiro Suzuka, Plant Mgr Welding Div. Shiro Suzuka, Mgr
Qlty Assurance Rep
Auto Qlty Div. Jiro Hamamatsu, Mgr
Taro Honda, Mss
Executive Director M/C Qlty Div. Saburo Hamamatsu, Mgr
Ichiro Hamamatsu, Plant Mgr
Qlty Div. Jiro Saitama, Mgr

Css
Welding Div. Saburo Saitama, Mgr
Ichiro Saitama, Plant Mgr
Qlty Div. Jiro Tochigi, Mgr

Tss
Eng Qlty Div. Saburo Tochigi, Mgr
Ichiro Tochigi, Plant Mgr

4/4
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall identify and outline the scope of activities of sub-suppliers for which a
supplier assume sole responsibility.
2) The supplier shall establish basic requirements for quality assurance of purchased parts
and outsourced processes in order for the quality of parts to be properly controlled by its
sub-suppliers.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
All component parts and materials that a supplier procures from
1 Purchased parts its sub-suppliers in order to produce products to be delivered to
Honda.
Supplier A first tier supplier to Honda who receives orders for parts
2
(tier 1supplier) directly from Honda.
Sub-Supplier A service provider whom a supplier purchases parts from and

outsources services to such as fabrication, testing, etc., and
3 ( tier 2 and including those who beyond the first service provider, it is
beyond) collectively referred to as sub-suppliers.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall exercise control over sub-suppliers on its own responsibly in order for the
requirements set by Honda to be thoroughly followed.
Supply parts provided by Honda are controlled in accordance with 【SQM 2-6 Control of
Supply Parts 】.
3.1 Selection of and Contracting with Sub-Suppliers
The supplier shall establish criteria for selecting sub-suppliers, perform evaluation, and
enter into a contract with sub-suppliers.
The suppler shall also create and maintain a list of such sub-suppliers with whom the
suppler has entered into a contract.
3.2 Quality Audit
3.2.1. The supplier shall perform quality audits of sub-suppliers on a regular basis or as
needed, confirm their quality performance and evaluate and/or re-evaluate them.
3.2.2. The supplier is required to be prepared in a manner that Honda can participate in a
quality audit of sub-suppliers if so requested by Honda( refer to【SQM 2-7 Supplier
Quality Evaluation】).
3.2.3. The supplier is required to maintain audit results in a manner that can be presented
or submitted to Honda upon request.
3.2.4. The supplier shall discuss with Honda if any restrictions apply to 3.2.2 and 3.2.3
above for reasons of confidentiality and nondisclosure agreement.
3.3 Important Safety Parts
The supplier shall, if using sub-suppliers with respect to important safety parts, assume
responsibility for and exercise control of sub-suppliers in a manner that ensures
requirements described in this manual are thoroughly implemented at the supplier’s
responsibility ( refer to【SQM 2-1 Important Safety Parts】).

1/4
July 1, 2014
3.4 Regulatory Compliance Certification

In the case where a secondary supplier is involved in required regulations, the supplier
ensures each important matter indicated in 【 SQM 2-2 Regulatory Compliance
Certification 】 is implemented properly, and controls the sub-supplier at their own
responsibility.
3.5 Process Design
If critical items are processed by a sub-supplier, the supplier shall be responsible for
managing the sub-supplier in a manner that ensures all requirements in this manual are
thoroughly implemented ( refer to【SQM 3-2 Process Design】).
3.6 Process Quality Control Table
The supplier shall specify a process in Process Quality Control Table if such process
which controls important quality characteristic specified by Honda is to be outsourced to a
sub-supplier.
The supplier shall clearly specify a process to be outsourced to sub-suppliers in the
supplier’s Process Quality Control Table, or as required by Honda, present or submit the
Process Quality Control Table of the sub-supplier’s to Honda.
However, if outsourcing all or part of production or fabrication processes, the outsourced
processes shall be treated as part of the supplier’s processes and controlled in a manner
following SQM( refer to【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table】).
3.7 Parts Inspection Criteria
If inspection items specified in the Inspection Criteria are performed by sub-suppliers, the
supplier shall collect the inspection results from such sub-suppliers and provide Honda
with the results ( refer to【SQM 3-5-1 Parts Inspection Criteria】).
3.8 Early Mass Production Quality Control
The supplier shall direct and control necessary sub-suppliers of component parts to
perform quality control of the same degree as set forth in this manual at the early stage of
mass production ( refer to【SQM 4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control】).
3.9 Identification and Traceability
To ensure traceability, the supplier shall assure that sub-suppliers employ the same
degree of control for manufacturing history ( refer to【SQM 4-3 Identification and
Traceability】).
3.10 Change Point Control
The supplier shall direct and control sub-suppliers and ensure IPP control of the same
level as this manual requires for the component parts processed by sub-suppliers ( refer
to【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】).
3.11 Correction and Improvement
The supplier shall review own sub-suppliers with respect to feedback on nonconformity
attributable to them and subsequent corrective actions taken, including quality
nonconformity found at Honda or in the market and problem found upon delivery, etc.,
and carry out a thorough prevention of recurrence and passing through of the problem.
The supplier shall receive a report from the sub-supplier, confirm the effect on parts and,
if necessary, takes an action in accordance with 【SQM 4-5 Corrective Action Report】, if
nonconformity found at a sub-supplier is deemed to have an effect on the supplier’s
parts.

2/4
July 1, 2014
3.12 Direct Delivery to Honda

The supplier shall, if delivering parts directly to Honda (including any location designated
by Honda) from sub-suppliers without going through the supplier, clarify verification
processes and control items using control plans such as process quality control sheet,
etc. in a manner that the final part quality can be verified.
3.13 Evaluation of Purchased Parts
Supplier shall establish testing methods and acceptance criteria, etc., for quality
evaluation of purchased parts (including limit samples or master samples as required),
and implement receiving inspection, etc. accordingly.
3.14 Confirmation of Pre-production Status
The supplier shall confirm, in order for its manufacturing plan for parts not to be affected
by changes made to a sub-supplier’s plan, the progress of production preparation, etc.
( refer to【SQM 3-9 Transition to Mass Production】) including the following points as a
minimum.
1) Control plans such as Process Quality Control Table and operation standards are
established and controlled in the sub-suppliers’ manufacturing processes (refer to
【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table 】and【SQM 3-7 Operation Control
Documents】).
2) Parts that are manufactured by the sub-supplier meet the requirements of applicable
drawings, specifications, etc. (refer to【SQM 3-9-1 Validity Testing】.
3) The sub-supplier’s manufacturing processes are assessed including process
capability( refer to【SQM 5-1 Process Capability】).
4) Productivity of production facilities and accuracy of measuring equipment, etc., are
maintained and required production capacity is assured (refer to 【 SQM 3-9
Transition to Mass Production】).
1 Sub-suppliers List Update to the latest version
2 Audit records of sub-suppliers ( or tier 2suppliers) 10 years
3 Analysis Record [Analysis Report] 10 years

15 years after the issue date
4 Process quality control table
of a discontinuation order.
5 Receiving inspection data 15 years
6 Results of pre-production status confirmation 5 years
7 Results of validation testing 5 years

3/4
July 1, 2014
1) SQM 2-1 Important Safety Parts
2) SQM 2-2 Regulatory Compliance Certification
3) SQM 2-6 Control of Supply Parts
4) SQM 2-7-2 Supplier Quality Audit
5) SQM 3-2 Process Design
7) SQM 3-5-1 Parts Inspection Criteria
8) SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents
10) SQM 3-9-1 Validity Testing
13) SQM 4-4 Change Point Control
14) SQM 4-5 Corrective Action Report

4/4
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall, where necessary, lend suppliers machines, dies, jigs and tools, etc.,
necessary to manufacture parts.
2) The supplier shall take over the control method of Honda to properly control machines,
dies, jigs and tools, etc., necessary to manufacture parts.
2 Definition
No. Term Definition
When necessary, after consulting with the supplier, Honda will
Honda-owned
1 lend machines, dies, tools and jigs, etc. needed to manufacture
property
parts, etc.
3 Requirement
3.1 Honda-owned Property
3.1.1 Identification
The supplier shall identify Honda owned properties in a manner that allows the items
to be visually explicit and permanently identifiable as lent items.
3.1.2 Maintenance
The supplier shall, when using lent items, perform maintenance and control its
records in accordance with the procedure provided by Honda to ensure proper
quality. If no procedure is provided by Honda, the supplier may establish its own
procedures to maintain lent items. If lent items are not used for a long period of time,
the supplier shall properly store and prevent deterioration in accuracy, functions, etc.
of the items. Perform additional preoperational inspections to verify there are no
problems with the condition of lent items when operations resume.
3.2 Use of Lent Items
The supplier shall comply with instructions for use of lent items provided by Honda, if any.
Unless otherwise deemed necessary by Honda, the supplier may not use lent items for
any purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally intended, or may not
alienate, sublease or mortgage such lent items to the third party.
3.3 Actions for Abnormal Conditions
The supplier shall, in the event that lent items are lost or damaged, or found not suitable
for use, report to Honda, determine a course of action after consultation with Honda, and
control records.
3.4 Return of Lent Items
The supplier shall, if Honda so requests, return lent items to Honda on the date, time and
place specified by Honda.
3.5 Records
The supplier shall, if Honda requires, control quality records related to lent items by
following instructions provided by Honda.
If no instructions are provided by Honda, the supplier may establish its own procedures
and maintain records accordingly.

1/2
July 1, 2014
Maintenance records of Honda-owned 15 years
1
properties
Records of actions for abnormal conditions of
2 15 years
Honda-owned properties

2/2
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) When Honda provides component parts to a supplier on consignment, Honda shall
control quality of the supply parts by clarifying roles and responsibilities of supply parts
users, supply parts suppliers, and Honda.
2) The supply parts user shall assure the quality of parts of own in accordance with the roles
and responsibilities defined by Honda.
3) The supply parts supplier shall assure supply parts in accordance with the roles and
responsibilities defined by Honda.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Component parts provided to a supplier by Honda to
manufacture parts to be delivered to Honda. This applies when
Honda purchases a part from a supplier (supply parts supplier)
1 Supply Parts
and/or manufactures a part, which is provided to another
supplier (user) for a fee to manufacture parts delivered to
Honda.
A supplier who uses supply parts as components in the
2 Supply Part User
manufacture of parts to Honda.
A company which has a direct contract with Honda, and
3 Supply Part Supplier provides supply parts to another company designated by
Honda.
Composite Quality A quality characteristic that will be demonstrated or explicated
4
Characteristics by a combination of supply parts and manufacturing parts.
Total Quality Quality characteristics of the final products completed by a
5
Characteristics supply part user.

1/5
July 1, 2014
3 Requirements
3.1 Responsibilities
The major responsibilities of supply part user, supply part supplier and Honda are
described in the following.
Supply 1) Perform receiving inspection (consult with Honda for details).
parts user 2) Request a supply parts supplier for analysis and measures if a
problem with supply parts is found.
3) Assure overall quality characteristic of complete parts.
4) Request Honda for a coordination meeting set forth in section 3.2 as
necessary.
Supply 1) Assure quality characteristics of parts of own manufacture.
parts 2) Disclose information to its user and Honda when necessary to control
supplier the quality of supply parts.
3) Perform analysis and measures against a problem with supply parts
requested by a supply part user (supply part user may perform
process verification as necessary)
4) Request Honda for a coordination meeting set forth in section 3.2 as
necessary.
Honda 1) Organize a coordination meeting with supply part users and supply
part suppliers to build consensus on the responsibility for quality
assurance of parts with composite quality characteristics.
2) Assure quality characteristics of supply parts manufactured by Honda.
3) Disclose information to supply parts users and supply parts suppliers
when necessary to control the quality of supply parts.
4) Request supply parts supplier to conduct analysis and measures if
any problems with supply parts are found after delivery to Honda.
3.2 Agreement on the burden of quality assurance of parts with composite quality
characteristics.
3.2.1 The supply parts user and supply parts supplier shall, if so requested by Honda,
take part in coordination meeting to discuss the burden of quality assurance of parts
with composite quality characteristics to reach agreement for items necessary to
control these parts. The items necessary for the control shall include the following at
a minimum.
1) Delivery packaging for supply parts
2) Handling of supply parts
3) The burden of quality assurance of parts with composite quality characteristics.
4) Handling of nonconforming parts.
5) The supply part supplier shall document and control records of the coordination
meeting, if so requested by Honda.
3.2.2 The supply part user and supply part supplier shall, if necessary to amend the
agreement reached at a coordination meeting, immediately report to Honda.

2/5
July 1, 2014
5 Flowchart
Supply Part Supplier Supply Part User Honda
Contact
M/L decided Purchasing-

cost section
Supply No
part
Normal
Yes
business flow
Notice to suppliers Purchasing-

cost section
Confirmation Confirmation
Request coordination meeting Request coordination meeting

New model
Decision of holding coordination meeting
(if required)
preparation
section
Coordination meeting notice
New model
Coordination meeting to build consensus on the responsibility for quality assurance of parts
preparation
(to be held if required)
& other
related
Sample event part section
production
Production Preparation Stage
New model
<<Improvement instruction>> preparation
Acceptance
inspection section
Fail
CM promotion Pass
Prior information on IPP

Event part production
Sample
Acceptance
Event part release event part
inspection
Pass production
Fail <<Imprvement
New model
instruction>>
CM Acceptance preparation
promotion Fail inspection section
Pass
Event part
production
Event part
release
<<Improvement instruction>> New model

Acceptance
preparation
Fail inspection
section
Pass
Event product production

3/5
July 1, 2014
Supply Part Supplier Supply Part User Honda

Contact
Request coordination meeting Request coordination meeting

Decision making of holding Receiving
coordination meeting quality
section
Receiving
quality
section
Coordination meeting to build consensus on the responsibility for quality assurance of parts Receiving
(to be held if required) quality &
other
MP part production related
section
MP part release
<<Improvement request>> Fail Fail << Submit information >>

Acceptance
inspection
Pass Receiving
<<Improvement instruction>> Judgment on
quality
Honda's
Fail intervention section
Pass
CM promotion MP part production
MP part release
Production Stage
CM detail report
Receiving
Fail Acceptance quality
inspection section
Pass
CM detail Pass CM detail Pass
confirmation confirmation
Fail Fail
Modified part production
Modified part release

Initial Product Control
[IPP]
IPP after quality

improvement
Fail Acceptance
inspection
Pass
MP part production
MP part release
[IPP]
IPP after quality

improvement
Fail Receiving
Acceptance
inspection quality
section
Pass
MP product production

4/5
July 1, 2014
Specification Change
Supply Part Supplier Supply Part User Honda Contact
Instruction of specification change Procureme
nt section
Keep track of specification changes Keep track of specification changes
Receiving
Request coordination meeting Request coordination meeting Decision of holding coordination
quality
meeting
section
(if required)
Receiving
Coordination meeting to build consensus on the responsibility for quality assurance of parts
quality &
(to be held if required)
other
IPP processing / production related
section
<<Improvement instruction>> Conformity Receiving

inspection quality
Fail
Implement CM section
Pass
Prior information on IPP

Event part production
IPP release
[IPP]
IPP after specification
change
<<CM request>> Fail Fail << Submit information >>

Acceptance
inspection
Pass Judgment on Receiving

Honda's
quality
intervention
section
要
<<Improvement instruction>>
CM promotion Required
IPP-installed part production

Production Stage
Part release
[IPP]
change
CM detail report
Fail Acceptance
Receiving
inspection quality
section
Pass
CM detail CM detail
confirmation confirmation
Pass Pass
Fail Fail
Modified part production
Modified part release

[IPP]
change
Fail Acceptance
inspection
Pass
MP part production
MP part release
[IPP]
change
Fail Acceptance
Receiving
inspection quality
section
Pass
MP product production
Fail Final
inspection
Pass
Finished product release

5/5
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall communicate the purpose and viewpoints of quality assessment to
suppliers.
2) The supplier shall become familiar with requirements of Honda and take appropriate
actions.
2 Definitions
The definitions of terms used in this manual are contained in【SQM 6-1 Glossary of Terms and
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall be evaluation for the following assessment items as a basis for the ability to
supply parts in accordance with requirements established by Honda.
The results of the evaluation may be used by Honda for determining maker layout.
The supplier shall sustain and improve the quality of parts to be delivered to Honda while
monitoring conformity to the requirements and consistently achieving targets for quality and
delivery timing.
3.1 Assessment items
1) Market quality evaluation
2) Delivery quality evaluation
3) Delivery evaluation (quantity, timing)
4) Quality assurance system evaluation
The results of occasional audit may be reviewed as part of the assessment.
3.2 Assessment viewpoints
The following are Honda’s viewpoints for each assessment item.
Assessment Item Viewpoint

Percentage of market warranty cost incurred
Changes in warranty claim rates
Market quality evaluation
Changes in warranty claim rates
Product
Changes in critical market quality problems

Delivery quality rating evaluation.
Delivery quality evaluation Changes in delivery quality rating evaluation.
Index
( refer to 【SQM 2-7-1 Changes in delivery quality dependability rating

Delivery Quality evaluation.
Evaluation 】) Changes in critical delivery quality problems
occurrence evaluation.
Delivery evaluation Delivery quantity and timing of mass-production parts
Quality assurance system
evaluation Quality assurance system evaluation by regular quality
(refer to【SQM 2-7-2 audit (QAV-1).
System Index
Quality Assurance Visit】)

Design and development Design and development Capability
system evaluation Mass Production Capability
conducted by HG for the
suppliers who own R&D Activities and accomplishment in the last one year
function.

1/2
July 1, 2014
3.3 Corrective Action Request

The supplier shall, if so requested by Honda for improvement based on the result of
quality evaluation, implement appropriate measures.
If deemed necessary, Honda shall conduct an audit, such as Quality Assurance Visit, for
quality improvement purposes.
1) SQM 2-7-1 Delivery Quality Evaluation
2) SQM 2-7-2 Supplier Quality Assurance Visit

2/2
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall inform suppliers of the results of delivery quality performance (including
supply parts).
2) The supplier shall monitor the results of performance, verify attainment of the target, and
continuously improve the delivery quality.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall be evaluated for delivery quality by Honda each month. The results
are classified into 6 evaluation levels.
3.1.1 Delivery quality evaluation criteria
Level 1 2 3 4 5 6
Delivery
Between Between Between Between Above
quality Below 6
6-18 18-30 30-60 60-90 90
performance points
points points points points points
score
3.1.2 Rating
Rating shall be given for delivery quality performance.
3.2 Performance review

The supplier shall include the results of delivery quality evaluation provided by Honda as
an input to the management review. Top management of the supplier shall review the
performance results and continually improve quality.
The results of delivery quality evaluation are compiled on a fiscal monthly basis and
issued as “Supplier Delivery Quality Ranking Report” and “Delivery Quality Performance
Report”. Honda shall send the results to the supplier’s Quality Assurance Representative
via the president of the supplier.
5 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
Send supplier delivery quality

evaluation results
President/quality assurance Purchasing,
Delivery Quality Supplier Delivery
representative Planning
Performance Quality Ranking
review results
Report Report
Carry out continuous

quality improvement

1/1
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall conduct quality audits of suppliers’ sites.
2) The supplier shall participate in the quality audit and take appropriate actions with respect
to the findings identified.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A member who was selected by a supplier from its own
Supplier
1 employees and leads assessment during a Quality Assurance
in-house visitor
Visit.
A section of Honda, which acts as a planning center for the
Lead section of
2 Quality Assurance Visit and issues individual audit plans to notify
Honda
suppliers of the audit
3 Category of Audit
3.1 The supplier shall receive a supplier’s quality audit conducted by Honda.
There are two types of audits: a regular audit and an occasional audit of suppliers’ quality
conducted by Honda.
No. Types of Audit Detail
Quality audit carried out to review the quality system of a
supplier and to verify the status of implementation of the quality
1 Regular audit system (also called “Quality Assurance Visit-1” or “QAV-1”).
This also includes verifying the suppliers’ audit results through
documents.
Of those which correspond to the following criteria, a supplier’s
quality audit which will be conducted when deemed necessary
by Honda (also referred to as QAV-2), and this will be
performed by specifying the scope of confirmation and
verification in accordance with the purpose of the audit..
Occasional 1) At occurrence of serious problem which is attributable to
2 the supplier
audit
2) When a new manufacturing process is used for the
production of new models or new derivatives, etc.
3) When establishing new business relationships with new
suppliers.
4) Others
3.2 Regular audit

3.2.1 Supplier Subject to Regular Audit
A supplier subject to regular audit shall be selected from among those with whom
Honda has entered into the General Agreement for Purchase of Parts and on the
basis of the following.
1) Suppliers produce important safety parts
2) Other suppliers for which Honda deems a quality audit is necessary.
3.2.2 Frequency of audit
The frequency of regular audits shall be at least once every two years in principle.
However, it may be changed in accordance with the discretion of Honda taking into
consideration the supplier’s status for quality.

1/4
July 1, 2014
3.2.3 Supplier in-house visitor

The supplier shall select suppler in-house visitors from its own employees and have
them participate in a regular audit.
3.2.4 Scope of Audit
The scope of audit shall include all aspects of the quality system. The review points
shall including the following.
1) Quality policy and organization
2) Quality system
3) Specification and design control
4) Control of documents and records
5) Control of suppliers
6) Control of component parts
7) Control of manufacturing processes
8) Control of manufacturing facilities
9) Final inspection and reliability testing
10) Control of monitoring and measuring devices
11) Control of nonconforming products and concession parts
12) Internal quality audit
13) Quality training
14) Compliance to the SQM requirements: review through the assessment of above
1-13 areas.
3.2.5 Countermeasure and Promotion
The supplier shall, based on audit report issued by Honda, formulate an
improvement plan and submit to Honda by the date specified. Honda may request
changes to the implementation plan where necessary.
3.2.6 Quality meeting
The supplier shall, attend a quality conference upon request from Honda, receive
evaluation reports on the implementation, and verify effectiveness of the results of
the measures.
3.3 Occasional audit
3.3.1 Supplier Subject to Occasional Audit
A supplier subject to occasional audit shall be selected from all suppliers with whom
Honda has entered into the General Agreement for Purchase of Parts.
3.3.2 Scope of Audit
The scope of the audit shall be determined by Honda in accordance with the purpose
of the audit.
3.3.3 Countermeasure and promotion
The supplier shall, based on the audit report issued by Honda, formulate an
improvement plan, obtain approval from the quality assurance representative or the
quality representative of the facility, and submit to Honda by the date specified.
Honda may request a change to the implementation plan where necessary.
3.3.4 Confirmation of countermeasure completion and documentation of results.
The supplier shall, upon request from Honda, verify completion of the
countermeasure taken and record results of verifications made.
1 Records of regular audit 10 years
2 Records of occasional audit 5 years

2/4
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
6.1 Regular audit (QAV-1)
Supplier Honda Contact Sec.
Issue Pur
annual regular Supervisory
inform of the
month of an audit schedule Unit
Confirm audit
<Audit
implemented
by supplier> Audit
Send implementation plan per
Prepare for the audit audit lead sec.
Auditing
Implement regular audit, confirm and coordinate findings, raise audit report form.
section
Audit
Prepare and plan measures Audit report first issue lead sec.
Implement Implement measures (measure request)
and take
measures
Quality meeting Auditing

(confirm schedule and details of measures, discuss the direction, etc.) section
Amend measure schedule

Implementation of measures
Approval from the Qlty Assurance

Rep. Improvement progress record Audit
lead sec.
Submit audit report
Approval
Audit report Audit

formal issue lead sec.
Record retention/maintenance Summary
for audit reports
QAV-1
report
Pur
Supervisory
Reflect on the next annual Unit
schedule

3/4
July 1, 2014
6.2 Occasional Audit (QAV-2)
Supplier Honda
Contact
Prepare audit schedule Audit

Define audit items lead sec.
Send implementation plan Audit

Prepare to receive an audit
per audit lead sec.
Auditing
Implement occasional audit, raise audit report form. section
Audit report first issue Audit

Prepare and plan measures
(measure request) lead sec.
Audit
Approval from the Qlty
Receive audit report lead sec.
Assurance Rep.
Implement measures
Auditing
Confirm completion of measures and record the result section
Audit report approval/ formal Audit

issue lead sec.
QAV-2
report

4/4
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall define the requirements to properly exercise the control of contaminants.
2) The supplier shall define control items, points, etc. for parts subject to contaminants
control and maintain satisfactory condition conforming to contaminants control criteria.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
1 Contaminants Foreign matter such as grain, grit, chip, burr, dirt, dust, etc.
Component parts constituting an automatic speed change
mechanism, such as AT (automatic transmission), CVT
Automatic
2 (continuously variable transmission), 4WD (4-wheel drive),
transmission, etc.
MCU (moment control unit), etc., and parts assembled to
them.
A ranking of contaminants control parts such as automatic
3 Cleanliness rank transmission, etc. in the order of influence of contamination on
the function of the automatic transmission, etc.
A ranking of contaminants control parts, which are not
4 Control priority ranking included in the definition of automatic transmission, etc., by
safety, function and performance.
3 Requirements
3.1 Key control parts
3.1.1 Of those parts such as automatic transmission, etc., the ones subject to intensive
control of contaminants shall be the parts whose cleanliness ranks and contaminant
mass criteria are specified on the drawing in accordance with HES (Honda
Engineering Standards). However, parts that are not specified on the drawing but are
set forth in section 6 “Contaminants Control Parts (automatic transmission, etc.)”
shall also be included.
3.1.2 Of those parts not included in the definition of automatic transmission, etc., the
ones subject to intensive control of contaminants shall be the parts set forth in
section 7 “Contaminants Control Parts (other than automatic transmission, etc.)”.
3.1.3 Cleanliness rank of each critical control part such as automatic transmission, etc.
shall be as follows.
Cleanness
Description
Rank
Control circuit parts whose failure, such as valve lock failure by contact
A
with contaminants, causes to lose function and quality of drive train.
Parts having contact with hydraulic fluid excluding control circuit parts
B whose failure, such as valve lock by contact with contaminants, causes to
lose function and quality of drive train
Parts not included in rank A nor B which can contaminate parts in rank A
C
or B indirectly by contact with contaminants.

1/7
July 1, 2014
3.1.4 Management priority ranks classified by key control parts not included in automatic
transmissions, etc. shall be as follows.
Management
Description
importance rank
Parts which may seriously injure basic functions (run, turn, stop, etc.)
A
of products by contaminants.
Parts which may affect basic functions (run, turn, stop, etc.) of
B
products by contaminants.
3.2 Contaminants control

3.2.1 The supplier shall appoint a section and person responsible for control items,
control points, etc. shown in the table below to maintain parts subject to
contaminants control in a manner satisfactory to contaminant requirements until
delivered to Honda.
No. Control Item Control Pint
1 Design of parts 1．Placing of cleanness ranking and contaminant mass criteria in
accordance with HES A3054 “DESIGNATION FOR CLEANLINESS
OF AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION”.
2 Verification of 1．Verification
cleanliness Other than automatic
Automatic transmission, etc
transmission, etc.
ranks and ・Drawing
Cleanness rank
・Section 6 this manual
management Management priority
・Section 7 this manual.
rank
importance
ranks
3 Setting of 1．Define items subject to contaminants control items during processing
contaminants and transportation.
control plans 2．Arrange preventives against contaminants mix-up.
3．Reflect contaminants control items in the standard documents.
4 Setting up of 1 ． Define packaging specifications and delivery packaging with

Delivery preventive measures for contaminants mix-ups.
Packaging.
5 Processing of 1．Cleaning control of processing facilities, jig & fixture, and work
parts supplies
2．Control of working conditions in the process of cleaning parts
3．Cleanliness control of circulating oil from QA device to parts
6 Inspection of 1．Setting up of inspection method and feedback of inspection results

contaminants 2．Agreement on contaminants control with supplier
3 ． Instruction for improvement of suppliers’ contaminants control
activities

2/7
July 1, 2014
7 Release/ 1．Implementation of preventive measures for keeping contaminants

delivery from entering release/delivery parts
2．Agreement on contaminants control with outside contractors for
transportation
8 Verification of 1．Feedback of delivery package verification

delivery
package
9 Storage of 1．Ensure prevention of contaminants in the storage parts
parts
3.3 Inspection of Parts Such As Automatic Transmission, etc.

3.3.1 The basic method for inspection of contaminants on parts such as automatic
transmission, etc. shall be sampling inspection.
3.3.2 The sampling inspection shall start from normal inspection and the severity of
inspection shall be adjusted as follows.
Reduced Normal inspection Tightened inspection

inspection
Start sampling inspection
Acceptance(three Improvement
consecutive times)
Failed 5 times in total. Sorting
Acceptance (three
consecutive times)
Rejection
Rejection (one time)
Discontinue sampling
(one time) inspection
3.3.3 The inspection frequency for each inspection severity category shall be as follows.
Severity of
Reduced inspection Normal inspection Tightened inspection
inspection
Frequency of Once every two
Once a month Once a week
inspection weeks
3.3.4 Collect inspection samples in accordance with the following part mass category (if
other than a whole number, shall be rounded).
The part mass shall be the values indicated on drawings.
Classification Less than More than
11～100g 101～500g 501～1000g
by part mass 10g 1001g
Sample size 10 5 5 3 3

3/7
July 1, 2014
3.3.5 The criteria for inspection of contaminants shall be as follows.

1) Part mass criteria (allowable maximum mass (mg) of contaminants per part)
Unit: mg
part 1001g
Cleanliness mass 10g or less 11 to 100g 101 to 500g 501 to 1000g
rank and more
A 0.5 or less. 0.7 or less. 1.0 or less. 1.1 or less. 1.3 or less.
B 0.7 or less. 1.0 or less. 1.4 or less. 1.6 or less. 1.8 or less.
C 1.4 or less. 2.0 or less. 2.8 or less. 3.2 or less. 3.6 or less.
2) The size of contaminants shall be 0.4mm max. as a target value.

3.3.6 Contaminant inspection method
1) Calculate the size of contaminant mass per inspection sample by measuring
total mass of contaminants collected by filtering the cleaning agent used for the
inspection sample in accordance with part mass category through a filter paper
with nominal filtration rating of 1μm or so.
2) Measure the size of contaminants by observing sampled contaminants using
magnifying lenses and microscopes, etc.
3.4 Inspection of parts other than automatic transmission.
3.4.1 The basic method for inspection of contaminants on parts other than automatic
transmission, etc. shall be sampling inspection.
3.4.2 The sampling inspection shall start from normal inspection, and severity of
inspection shall be adjusted in accordance with section 3.3.2 .
3.4.3 The frequency of inspection for each inspection category of severity shall be in
accordance with section 3.3.3.
3.4.4 The inspection sample shall be picked up for each inspection category as follows.
Reduced Normal Tightened
Severity of inspection
inspection inspection inspection
Number of samples 2 3 3
3.4.5 The criteria for contaminant inspection shall be as follows.

Management priority
Criteria
rank
A No contaminants of 0.2 mm or larger in size shall be found.
Quantity of contaminants of about 0.2 mm shall be six or less,
B and also no contaminants of 0.2mm or larger in size shall be
found.
3.4.6 Contaminant Inspection Method

1) Filter the cleaning agent through filter paper per inspection sample unit, and
using magnifying lenses and microscopes, measure the size and quantity, etc.
of sampled contaminants.
2) Only if the size and quantity of contaminants of parts satisfy the judgment
criteria, the parts shall be deemed acceptable

4/7
July 1, 2014
3.5 Control of Inspection Records, etc.

3.5.1 Collected contaminants and inspection records of the collected contaminants shall
be controlled in a manner that allows the supplier to present the contaminants or
records to Honda whenever so requested by Honda
1 Collected Contaminants 1 year
2 Contaminant Inspection Records 5 years
2) HES A3054 “Designation for Cleanliness of Automatic Transmission”.

5/7
July 1, 2014
6 Contaminants control parts (automatic transmission, etc.)

Category of Cleanliness rank
Mechanism A B C
AT TC case COMP Regulator valve body ASSY Baffle plate COMP C3 gear Shift rail screw set Suction pipe Pick up ASSY Transmission hanger
Transmission case Governor ASSY Breather pipe M4 gear Servo detent ASSY Oil cooler (including trailer Drive transfer gear Torque converter cover
R side cover COMP Servo body ASSY Breather cap C4gear Control shaft COMP traction kit) Differential ASSY Change cover
Clutch ASSY Linear solenoid ASSY Transfer case Counter reverse gear Manual valve pin ATF gauge COMP Hypoid pinion Transmission under
Feed pipe COMP Accum. piston Transfer side cover Reverse idle shaft holder Manual valve roller Oil level pipe COMP Hypoid ring gear guard
Main shaft COMP L/C body ASSY T case packing COMP Change shaft COMP ATF filter bolt Final driven gear Speed meter gear holder
Counter shaft COMP Secondary body ASSY R side cover packing Reverse idle gear Servo detent sleeve COMP Oil hose pipe COMP Throttle adjust bolt plate
Secondary shaft Secondary filter Oil guide cover Reverse gear selector P/BRK Joint bolt COMP Extension shaft Throttle cable COMP
Shift rail Second accum. body ASSY Oil guide plate Selector hub P/BRK spring Joint bolt Control lever
Oil pump gear MOD body ASSY LOW gear Speed meter gear ASSY P/BRK stopper Bypass body Control wire holder
ATF strainer Shift solenoid ASSY Counter LOW gear Speed meter gear holder Parking pole spring Bypass body cover Throttle control lever
TRQ/CONV ASSY L/C solenoid ASSY One-way clutch ASSY Gear holder seal P/BRK pole Throttle valve shaft COMP Position sensor ASSY
Main valve body ASSY Oil pressure sensor Parking gear Speed meter gear COMP Parking shaft Throttle cam stopper Meter cable clip
Separate plate Stator shaft COMP M2gear Companion flange COMP Cooler hose Throttle cable stay Oil pipe clip COMP
Shift valve cover C2gear Reverse shift fork Transmission magnet Accum. cover
Servo detent base COMP Accum. spring
ＣＶＴ Fly wheel case Manual valve body pipe Oil pan RVS return spring COMP Secondary drive gear Parking brake pole Pitot pipe stay Transmission hanger
Transmission case COMP Differential cover RVS brake plate ASSY Parking pole SPG ATF gauge COMP Control wire stay
COMP Input shaft COMP Intermediate plate ASSY RVS brake disc Planetary gear COMP Detent spring ASSY Oil hose pipe COMP B
R side cover ASSY Oil pump ASSY Pulley cover plate COMP RVS brake disc spring Sun gear O/P drive sprocket Pick up ASSY
Forward clutch ASSY ATF Filter COMP A RVS brake end plate Ring gear COMP O/P drive chain Final driven gear
RVS brake piston Valve body ASSY FW case packing Oil path pipe holder COMP Drive sprocket hub Pitot pipe Oil pipe clip COMP
Start clutch ASSY Manual valve body ASSY I/M plate packing LUB pipe Control lever Pitot LUB pipe Cotter retainer
Feed pipe Manual separate plate R over packing Secondary gear shaft Control shaft COMP Pitot flange Circlip retainer
Oil path pipe COMP Linear solenoid ASSY Oil pan packing P/BRK rod holder
４ＷＤ Pump body ASSY ATF strainer Rear differential magnet TCD case Oil pump pin Pinion shaft Transfer driven bevel gear Breather tube joint
Clutch piston D ring COMP Hypoid gear Back-up ring Transfer shaft Differential clutch ASSY Breather tube clamp
Companion flange Pinion spacer Pinion gear SET Driven transfer gear Oil pump drive shaft Breather tube ASSY
Differential ASSY Piston spring Differential case Transfer drive bevel gear Transfer case Breather tube
Differential carrier SET Transfer side cover
ＭＣＵ R/L clutch case COMP Regulator valve R side cover Center shaft Planetary ASSY Clutch disc Special bolt Under cover
L side cover ASSY Oil pump driven gear R side cover packing R/L clutch case packing L central gear Clutch plate Oil pump gear cover MCU sub-harness
Solenoid valve body Oil pump drive gear Breather cover packing Solenoid body packing R central joint COMP Clutch return spring Oil hose pipe COMP Harness clamp stay
Solenoid separate Clutch piston Extension tube COMP Breather cover COMP R central gear Spring guide plate Sub-harness stay
plate ATF strainer COMP Extension shaft Valve cap plate C central gear Clutch end plate Breather tube ASSY
Linear solenoid ASSY Regulator valve spring
Shift solenoid ASSY Regulator valve cap
Oil pressure sensor
Oil TEMP sensor
Common Seal ring Cooler hose Thrust washer Needle bearing Washer Spring washer
parts Drive shaft Distance collar Thrust needle bearing Shim Drain plug bolt
Half shaft Snap ring Oil seal Snap ring Plug washer
Flange bolt Ball bearing Collar Dowel pin Differential pinion thrust
O ring Ball radial bearing Roller Hex nut washer
Cotter Taper bearing circlip Flange nut Spring pin
Radiator (AT oil cooler)

6/7
July 1, 2014
7 Contaminants Control Parts ( other than automatic transmission)

Management
importance A B
rank
 Brake system  Driving channel system

・Brake master cylinder ・Water pump COMP
・ABS solenoid valve ・Radiator ASSY
・ABS ASSY ・Water hose
・Brake hose (pipe) ・Reserve tank
・Wheel cylinder ・Cooling water circuit component
・Caliper ASSY
・Master power ASSY  Lubrication system
・Proportioning valve ASSY ・Oil pump ASSY
・Oil pressure switch
 Steering system ・Manual transmission ASSY
・Steering gear BOX ・Crank shaft COMP
・P/S pump ASSY ・Cylinder head
・Speed sensor ・Cylinder block
Part group ・Oil tank ・Component with ENG
・Feed hose
・Pipe, tube  Function system
・Oil cooler ・Front fork
・Front damper
 Fuel system ・Rear damper
・Carburetor ASSY ・Distributor
・Fuel feed pipe COMP ・Completed system function part with
・Fuel strainer COMP rotating/sliding function
・ Circuit component filtered
through fuel filter  EM control system
・Control BOX ASSY
・Rubber hose
・EM control circuit component
 Fuel system
・Fuel tank
・Fuel pump
・Circuit component not filtered through
fuel filter

7/7
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall identify quality records which Honda may require suppliers for presentation.
2) The supplier shall retain quality records, when so designated in SQM in accordance with
requirements established by Honda.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
No. Term Definition
The act of organizing frequently-used documents in a manner
1 Storage
that allows fast retrieval during daily business operations.
The act of preserving less-frequently-used documents (including
electronic medium) in a location such as archive and stockroom
2 Retention
outside the worksite in a manner that allows prompt retrieval
when needed.
3 Requirements
3.1 Storage and retention of quality records
3.1.1 The supplier shall, if maintain quality records on electronic media, make the
records available for Honda to view with a support from the supplier associates upon
request from Honda.
3.1.2 The supplier shall give consideration for retention and storage means in order for
the records not to become illegible due to deterioration of the media or changes in
the environment for use.
3.2 Retention Period
The supplier shall, for the period of time specified in the “Control of Records” section in
respective SQM articles, ensure retention and/or storage of quality records concerned.
The retention period shall be the duration from the day of establishing or receiving to the
day of disposition of the records.
3.3 Presentation or submission of quality records
3.4.1 The supplier shall, in response to a request from Honda, present or submit quality
records to Honda. Honda may request submission of relevant quality records on
electronic media.
3.4.2 The supplier shall, if so requested by Honda for presentation or submission of
stored quality records, provide information in regard to the time needed until
presenting or submitting the records.
3.4 Disposition of records
The supplier shall, for quality records that have reached their retention period, dispose
them after rendering the contents illegible.

1/1
July 1, 2014
3 Pre-Production Stage
1 Overview
1) Honda shall designate key control parts, and verify production preparation activities of a
supplier for the key control parts.
2) The supplier shall plan production preparation activities to be linked to the pre-production
schedule of Honda. Items to complete at each stage of Pre-production shall be defined in
order for the supplier to thoroughly implement the planned activities.
2 Definition
No Term Definition
1 Stage A management method that controls supplier activities on a
Management step-by-step basis. The processes of pre-production and mass
production are divided into 6 stages from stage I to stage VI.
Main activity to be completed at each stage is described below.
Stage Ⅰ：Obtain product requirements from Honda (Stage I will
be omitted hereafter since this stage consists of activities prior
to the Pre-production).
Stage Ⅱ：Formulate a manufacture management plan.
Stage Ⅲ ： Promote activities required based on the
manufacture management plan.
Stage Ⅳ：Verify quality maturation status.
Stage Ⅴ：Confirm the prospect of transition to mass production
and declare completion of production preparation.
Stage Ⅵ：Mass production.
2 Manufacturing A management plan to monitor progress of the activities specified
Management Plan in the Stage Management.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall formulate a manufacturing management plan that includes control items
designated in Article 3.3 “Control Items and Objectives” at a minimum, and implement
activities to achieve objectives set forth for each stage for respective control items.
3.1 The supplier shall formulate a manufacturing management plan in conjunction with
respective stages below.
Honda (Design & Pre-production Stage Mass Production
Development Stage) Stage
Supplier Pre-production Stage Mass Production Stage
Timing
Prototype Dwg Prototype Dwg M/P Dwg
Event Tooling Quality Volume Mass production

Plan ◆ Tooling Go Confirmation Confirmation Confirmation Confirmation
(Honda)
Stage Ⅱ Ⅲ Ⅳ Ⅴ Ⅵ
3.2 The supplier shall monitor the progress status of control items at each stage. In case of
delay in the progress, amend the manufacturing management plan and recover the delay.
If there is a possibility that it may affect Honda’s production plan, the supplier shall inform
Honda (new model preparation section).

1/7
July 1, 2014
3.3 Control Items and Objectives (suppliers are to work with Honda for each product in accordance with the following as the basis)
Stage/Category Pre-Production Stage Production Stage
No. Control Item
Outline Stage Ⅱ Stage Ⅲ Stage Ⅳ Stage Ⅴ Stage Ⅵ
1 Supplier’s production A supplier’s production plan for the pre-  Draw up a plan  Reflect delivery  Address
plan. production stage drawn up in line with and quantity to concerns from
Honda’s production plan. the plan. the previous
 Manage planned  Trial with final  Finish up final stage.
2 Tooling Plan Draw up plan for designing, manufacturing  Decide quantity
and application of dies and molds (press, of dies and and actual and permanent model dies or  Production and
plastic and casting and forging) adjusted molds. outputs. model dies or molds (hardening delivery in line
 Measures with Honda’s
to the required level.  Decide molds. process, etc.)
against the  Product sintering production plan.
If there are more than two dies or molds, manufacturers.
 Confirm by  Practice quality
draw up a plan per die or mold.  Decide plans per differences evaluation.
between planned continues control in line with
die or mold.
and actual production 【SQM 4-1 Early
outputs. Mass Production
Quality Control】
3 Production facility Installation plan for facilities (new,  Decide  Manage planned  Perform line trials  Confirm by and【SQM 4-2
setup refurbished, etc.) necessary to secure production facility and actual with permanent continues
Mass Production
required quality (production capacity, concept. outputs. facilities. production Quality Control】
included).  Decide schedule  Measures  Product  Check quantity.
for facility setup. against the evaluation.  Verify process
differences  Process capability.
between planned capability
and actual verification.
outputs.
4 Jig/ testing device/ Plan to secure needed jigs/testing  Schedule a date  Manage planned  Confirm the  Check the
inspection equipment devices/ inspection equipment to to set up jigs/ and actual accuracy of jigs/ operation state of
setup (dimensions guarantee required quality. testing devices/ outputs. testing devises/ inspection
and accuracy). inspection  Measures inspection equipment in the
equipment and against the equipment. line during
complete process differences continuous
design. between planned production test
and actual runs
outputs.

2/7
July 1, 2014

No. Control Item
Outline Stage Ⅱ Stage Ⅲ Stage Ⅳ Stage Ⅴ Stage Ⅵ
5 Validity testing A plan that will be used to confirm required  Concerns on  Commence  Complete  Address
part characteristics, based on roles and required quality variation testing. variation testing. concerns from
responsibilities agreed with Honda. and measures  Progress the previous
Carry out tests on specifications specified against them performance stage.
in the applicable drawing (specifications  Draw up a test management  Production and
included). plan. against the plan. delivery in line
with Honda’s
6 QA device validity A plan used to validate QA device.  Decide QA  Manage planned  Verify QA device.  Check the
production plan.
testing (function) device concept. and actual operation state of
 Practice quality
 QA device setup outputs. QA devices in the
line during control in line with
plan
continuous 【SQM 4-1 Early
production test Mass Production
runs Quality Control】
and【SQM 4-2
7 Production capability Plan to determine the number of  Set the maximum  Manage planned  Perform line trials  Verify continuous
Mass Production
man-hours and manpower needed for the production and actual with permanent production Quality Control】
planned volume of vehicle production to capacity and outputs. facilities.  Check quantity.
ensure delivery time and quantity. decide schedule  Measures
for procurement against the
of needed differences
resources. between planned
and actual
outputs.
8 Process proficiency of Develop required control documents and  Draw up training  Commence  Commence  Complete
operators. draw up plans for improving operators’ plans. training with training with operators’
proficiency in the line. actual parts. required line takt proficiency
 Draw up control time. requirements.
documents.

3/7
July 1, 2014
No. Control Item
Outline Stage II Stage III Stage IV Stage V Stage VI
9 Color matching A verification plan to reproduce the  Know about  Manage planned  Agree the final  Agree the master  Address
verification required color. specified parts and actual master sample sample for mass concerns from
and their color. outputs. production the previous
 Draw up  Select paint. products. stage.
verification plans.  Production and
delivery in line
10 Grain and gross Plan to reproduce the required  Understand the  Manage planned  Agree the final  Agree the master
with Honda’s
matching verification. appearance (grain and gross). scope of subject and actual master sample. sample for mass
production plan.
parts. outputs. (depth or trends production
 Practice quality
 Draw up a plan. of impression of products
grain pattern, control in line with
etc.). 【SQM 4-1 Early
Mass Production
11 Illumination master Plan to ensure the illumination  Understand the  Manage planned  Agree the final  Agree the master Quality Control】
specification comply with the master scope of subject and actual master sample. sample for mass and【SQM 4-2
sample. parts. outputs. production
Mass Production
 Draw up a plan. products Quality Control】.
12 Feeling master Plan to ensure feeling complies with the  Understand the  Manage planned  Agree the final  Agree the master
master sample. scope of subject and actual master sample. sample for mass
parts. outputs. production
 Draw up a plan. products
13 Control items at each Plan to conduct process FMEA, etc. and  Determine  Decide on control  Process  Process
manufacturing determine items requiring control in a possible causes items for the improvement. improvement
process process. by conducting manufacturing
process FMEA. process.
14 Lot No. Display Detail Plan to define lot control numbers to  Understand the  Manage planned  Check devices  Check
display on the parts, hand in “Lot No. scope of subject and actual for display of part continuous lot
Display Details” to Honda, and to carry out parts. outputs. lot. number display in
lot identification.  Decide the Lot the line.
No. Display
Details.
 Process set-up
plan for lot
identification.

4/7
July 1, 2014

No. Control Item
15 Process quality An action plan for the process quality  Decide process  Verify processes  Address
control table control table. sequence in line with the concerns from
(process system process quality the previous
diagram) control table. stage.
 Formulate the  Production and
process quality delivery in line
control table. with Honda’s
production plan.
16 Approval mark Application for part approval and approval  Confirm  Manage planned  Evaluate  Gain part
mark display. regulatory and actual products approval.  Practice quality
control in line with
requirements. outputs. (conformity with  Display an
【SQM 4-1 Early
 Understand the  Agree on drawings). approval mark on
the parts. Mass Production
scope of subject approval mark
Quality Control】
parts. identification  Submit an
and 【 SQM 4-2
 Draw up a plan methods. approval
Mass Production
for gaining  Part approval certificate and
Quality Control】
approval. application. test reports to
Honda.
17 Material identification Material identifiation for the recycling of  Understand the  Agree  Evaluate
materials of parts. scope of subject identification products
parts. methods. (conformity with
drawings
including
specifications.

5/7
July 1, 2014

No. Control Item
18 Management of Plan to ensure compliance of products  Confirm  Confirm  Carry out  Present or  Address
compliance with laws with laws and regulations. restrictions. conformity of inspection to submit inspection concerns from
and regulations.  Understand the purchased ensure results. the previous
scope of subject materials. compliance with stage.
parts/materials. laws and  Production and
 Draw up a plan regulations. delivery in line
to ensure with Honda’s
compliance. production plan.
 Mass  Practice quality

19 Mass Production Confirm transition of production to mass
Production control in line with
Transition Declaration production.
【SQM 4-1 Early
Transition
Mass Production
Declaration
Quality Control】
and 【 SQM 4-2
Mass Production
Quality Control】

6/7
July 1, 2014
1 Manufacturing management plan 5 years
1) SQM 2-2 Regulatory Compliance Certification
3) SQM 3-5-3 Grain and Color Adjustment
5) SQM 3-9-1 Validity Testing
7) SQM 4-2 Mass Production Quality Control

7/7
3-2 Process Design
July 1, 2014
3-2 Process Design
1 Overview
1) Honda shall define the requirements for suppliers to design a process.
2) The supplier shall clarify requirements for designing a process, and maintain the
manufacturing process at an appropriate quality level.
2 Definitions
The definitions of terms used in this manual are as follows. For other terms and definitions,
refer to【SQM 6-1 Glossary of Terms and Definitions】
№ Term Definition
1 Recall, etc. A general term for market action, which includes recall,
improvement campaign, service campaign and extended
warranty.
2 Recall An act of implementing improvement measures by
submitting a notice to the competent authorities in
accordance with Paragraph 3 of Article 63 (Report, etc. of
Corrective Action) of Road Vehicles Act (Law No.185 of
1951).
This includes the implementation of equivalent actions in
foreign countries in accordance with the laws and
regulations of those countries.
3 Improvement campaign An action taken by Honda to implement improvement
measures by submitting a notice to the competent
authorities in accordance with Article 9 (Improvement
Campaign) of Circular Notice "Handling Procedure for
Notification, etc. of Recall" (Jishin No.1530 of December 1,
1994, hereinafter referred to as "Circular Notice").
4 Service campaign An act of implementing improvement measures by
submitting a notice to the competent authorities in
accordance with Article 10 (Implementation of Service
Campaign) of Circular Notice.
5 Extended warranty An act of extending the warranty period, submitting a
notice to the competent authorities, and implement
improvement measures.
3 Requirements
3.1 Process Control Item Setting
3.1.1 The supplier shall, to ascertain quality requirements through the drawing
(specifications included) and maintain appropriate quality, set control items in
consideration of the following when designing manufacturing processes (refer to
【SQM 5-2 Error Proofing 】and【SQM 5-5 Process FMEA】).
1) Part design input requirements
2) Required production capacity and process capability
3) Capability and accuracy of production equipment
4) Capability and accuracy of measuring equipment
5) Experience from past process designs
6) Past problems attributed to process designs
7) Possible problems predicted by Process FMEA and/or other means.
8) Incorporation of error proof measures as necessary
9) Necessary inspection and testing

1/3
3-2 Process Design
July 1, 2014
3.1.2 The supplier shall classify defined control items into quality characteristics items
and process control items, and establish control methods respectively.
3.1.3 The supplier shall create a process quality control table based on the results of
paragraph 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 above in accordance with【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality
Control Table】.
3.2 Designation and Control of Critical Items
3.2.1 The supplier shall designate control items that meet any of the following conditions
as critical items.
1) An item which has a mark（○ Q ） on its product drawings, specifications, etc.
2) A control item which directly affects the inspection item with item importance A
defined in the inspection criteria.
3) An item related to quality characteristics and manufacturing conditions that may
result in a defect of an important function (such as running, turning, stopping,
guard, insulation, protection, exhaust gas controlling or identification) as defined
in Honda Engineering Standard (HES A 3050).
4) An item for which recall, etc. was taken in the past.
Items involved in a recall, etc. in the past
5) An item for which a focused control is judged to be required based on the
process capability evaluation, the past quality performance (market quality
information, in-house quality information, in-process failure), the manufacturing
quality criteria, etc.
3.2.2 The supplier shall control critical items with consideration to the following
requirements.
1) Identify critical items on process quality control table, operation standard, etc.
2) Submit data of periodic inspections or testing, if so required by Honda.
3) Assign personnel who are trained with the knowledge of the relevant processes.
4) Assess the process capability in accordance with【SQM 5-1 Process Capability ,
if so required by Honda.
5) If applicable, apply contaminants control in accordance with 【 SQM 2-8
Contaminants Control】.
3.2.3 If critical items are processed by a sub-supplier, the supplier shall be
responsible for managing the sub-supplier in a manner that all requirements in this
manual are thoroughly implemented ( refer to 【SQM 2-1 Important Safety Parts】、
【SQM 2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance 】and 【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality
Control Table】).

2/3
3-2 Process Design
July 1, 2014
3.3 Work environment

3.3.1 The supplier shall, if deemed necessary in accordance with quality characteristics
and control items of parts, manage work environment with consideration to the
following conditions.
1) Dust-proof room designed to prevent contaminants from entering inside.
2) Temperature controlled room to maintain precision of measuring instruments.
3) Quiet environment suitable for auditory testing.
4) Illumination condition for visual inspection process.
5) Antistatic facility.
6) Others
3.3.2 The supplier shall address product safety and means to minimize potential risks to
employees (e.g. protection mat for falling parts, necessary protectors, etc.).
3.4 Result review
3.4.1 The supplier shall put the process into operation in accordance with the process
quality control table, operation standard, etc. The Quality Assurance Representative,
Facility Quality Representative or appointed deputy shall review the results of
process design. The record of the review results shall be kept retrievable when so
requested by Honda.
3.4.2 The supplier shall maintain documents used for designing processes, and utilize
them in the investigation, analysis, and measures when a problem occurs, as well as
in the development of the next model.
5) SQM 5-2 Error Proofing
6) SQM 5-5 Process FMEA

3/3
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall define contents and provide operation procedure for process quality control
table.
2) The supplier shall control and maintain the process quality control table and use for the
following purposes.
a) Management of control items for in-process quality assurance.
b) Monitoring of process control conditions.
c) Accumulation and conveyance of skills and technology, etc.
2 Definitions
No Term Definition
Quality Property and performance subject to quality evaluation, and
1
Characteristics standards and criteria to control them.
Control items for the set up condition and its standards and/or
Production
2 criteria necessary to ensure quality required for respective
Conditions
manufacturing processes.
3 Requirements
3.1 Preparation criteria
The supplier shall design manufacturing processes, conduct process FMEA, etc., and
draw up process quality control table in accordance with drawings, specifications, etc.
issued by Honda and/or those draw up by the supplier and verified by Honda.
3.2 Subject Parts and Processes
3.2.1 Process Quality Control Table shall be made for all parts ordered by Honda. For the
parts with the same or similar process sequence, quality characteristics, production
condition, etc., a representative process quality control table may be accepted with
the attachment of “Process Quality Control Table (Appendix) List of Applied
Parts“(Form-5) set forth in section 8.11.
The differences between process sequence, quality characteristics and production
conditions of similar parts shall also be clearly entered appending to the process
quality control table of the representative parts.
3.2.2 Regardless of the preceding section, the supplier may exclude standardized parts
that comply with standards such as ISO (International Organization for
Standardization), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standards), and HES (Honda
Engineering Standards) from the subject parts for the process quality control table.
However, if so requested by Honda, the supplier shall follow the direction and
provide the process quality control table for review.
3.2.3 The supplier shall include all processes from the receiving of materials and
component parts to the shipping of finished product to Honda (or to the supply parts
user) in the process quality control table. Process quality control table shall be made
per delivery package (per delivery package to the receiving party if shipped as
supply parts).
3.2.4 The supplier shall, in the event of employing an outsourced process after receiving
component parts, encompass all processes from the release to the delivery of parts
from outsourced service providers in the process quality control table.
3.2.5 If any of the important quality characteristics designated by Honda is processed at
sub-suppliers, the supplier shall include such outsourced processes in supplier’s
process quality control table.

1/15
July 1, 2014
3.3 Submission Procedure

3.3.1 The supplier shall be notified by Honda of the scope of process quality control table
to be submitted to Honda. Honda shall issue ”Process Quality 〔 Notice for
Submission of Process Quality Control Table〕” (Form-1) in section 8.1 when
applicable.
However, if excluded from such submission, the supplier shall manage process
quality control table in a manner that is readily available for Honda to view if so
requested by Honda.
3.3.2 The supplier shall, with approval of its Quality Assurance Representative or the
Facility Quality Representatives submit the original of the process quality control
table to Honda by the date specified.
3.3.3 The supplier shall if there are any changes made to the contents of the process
quality control table submitted to Honda, revise and resubmit the process quality
control table to Honda immediately. Related processes, i.e. change point control,
shall be completed in accordance with【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control 】, etc.
3.3.4 The supplier shall submit a process quality control table using the forms below.
1) “Process Quality [Process Quality Control Table Issuance Report]”
(Form -2)
2) “Process Quality Control Table (I)” (Form -3)
3) “Process Quality Control Table (II)” (Form -4)
4) “Process Quality (Appendix)” (Form -5)
(Used when issuing as a representative for multiple parts.)
3.3.4.1 The supplier may choose to use its format in lieu of “Process Quality Control
Table (I)” and “Process Quality Control Table (II)” on the condition that Honda
confirms all items set forth in those forms are covered in the supplier’s format.
3.3.4.2 The supplier shall, if a note was added referring other documents e.g. “XX
standards, etc.” in the quality characteristics field and the production conditions
field control the cited documents in a manner that is readily available for Honda
to view.
3.3.4.3 The supplier shall, if Honda requests submission of a process quality control
table made by sub-suppliers, submit that of the Quality Assurance
Representative or the Facility Quality Representative approved.
3.4 Process Quality Control Table Entries
The suppler shall follow the direction provided in section 8, and make appropriate entries
with required information in “Process Quality Control Table (I)” and “Process Quality
Control Table (II)”.
3.5 Use of Process Quality Control Table
The supplier shall put the process quality control table into practice in accordance with
“Process Quality Control Table Operation Flowchart” in section 7.
3.6 The supplier shall, if the need for a new process quality control table arises due to the
launch of production at a new plant or in a new line after new model start-up, report to
Honda in advance, and proceed according to the directions, such as prior presentation of
parts, submission of a new process quality control table on the specified date, etc.
4 Key points
1) Conduct process FMEA and define control items required as manufacturing standards.
2) Perform casting parts pressure leakage testing with the parts for which the final
fabrication was completed.
3) Choose cleaning agent taking into consideration chemical reactions with substances
used subsequently, such as rust inhibitor, lubricant, etc.
4) In the event of confirming the status of reflection of the requirements in the process
quality control table, cross check the requirements for products with drawings
(specifications included).

2/15
July 1, 2014
15 years after the issue of discontinuation
1 Process Quality Control Table
order.

3/15
July 1, 2014
7 Flowchart “Process Quality Control Table Operation Flowchart”

Suppler Honda
Contact
New model
Process design Drawing preparation
- Process FMEA section
Receipt
- Problem containment system
- Error proofing
Create Process Quality

Control Table (I) and (II)
Purchasing,
Planning
Establish and issue or

Review Process inspection Criteria
Quality Control Procurement
Process verification with

Process Quality Control Issuance of "Notice for new model
Submission of Process preparation
Quality Control Table "
　　 - Reflect process FMEA review section
　　 - Review instructions from Honda
　　 - Drawing change details
Create "Process
Quality Control New model
Table Issuance Request submission of preparation
Receipt
Report" Process Quality Control Table
section
Submit by due date

(Not required to submitt) Approve
Review Process 　　　　NG Verify Process New model

Quality Control Table Quality Control Table preparation
section
OK
A need for
revision of
Process Quality Process Quality
Store Control Table is
identified Receipt Control Table Procurement
Process
Quality submission request
Control Table Notice of PQCT
originals submission
Production Stage
Create "PQCT request

Review
Process issurance
Report"
Quality
Control Table
・When submission is required by Honda
・When PQCT is revised
Approva
(Not required to submitt)
NG Procurement
Verify Process
Quality Control Table
Return the original OK

after verification

4/15
July 1, 2014
8 Forms
8.1 Notice for Submission of Process Quality Control Table (Form 1) (referential)
(Form - 1)
Process Quality [ Notice for Submission of Process Quality Control Table ] Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Issue date: / /
Month day Year
To:
Div/BL/MO
Material Division
Approved by Created by
Quality Assurance Representati
◇ Please submit ( new / revised ) Process Quality Control Table for the following parts.
№ Model Part Number Part Name Grounds for submission

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
◇ Submission due date, organization and contact information are as follows.
Due date / / (month/day/year)

Location Dept/BL/MO
Dept/BL/MO
Contact info. Phone No.
Fax No.
　- Routing: Issue Division => VendersProcurem (Copy) => Supplier

entDept
(Original: attached to Process Quality Control Table)
=> Issue Division (retain original)
Original to be retained until: / (month/year)

01121

5/15
July 1, 2014
8.2 Process Quality Control Table Issuance Report (Form 2) 1/2

(Form - 2) Please complete all
applicable fields
Process Quality [Process Quality Control Table Issuance Report]
enclosed by bold line.
Facility name: Section:
To: Issue date: / / (YYYY/MM/DD)

Company Name
Contact Person Name
Address
Telephone
Please place a circle in the box of your reason.
Due to submission request notice (new/revised)

Notification New # of original:
classification
Notification
document
Due to an arrangement with Mr./Ms _______, Honda Revised # of revisions made:
Due to company reasons.
Reason:
Part Number Part Name This notification takes effect

from the delivery date below.
Honda
Supplier
from / (month/day)
Comments from the confirmation division. Received by
Received on / / (yyyy/mm/dd)
Returned by
Returned on / / (yyyy/mm/dd)
01121 Original to be retained until: / (year/month)

6/15
July 1, 2014
8.3 Process Quality Control Table Issuance Report (Form 2 ) Entry procedure 2/2
(Form - 2) Sample
Process Quality [Notification of Process Quality Control Table Issuance] Sample
Process Quality [Notice Requiring Submission of Process Quality Control Table] Please complete all applicable fields within the bold lines.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. No. Description
3 2 1 Fill in the issue date in A.D. year.
2 Sign or seal after all required fields were completed by the supplier.
Facility name: Division:
Issue date: 1 / / (mm/dd/yy) 3 Quality Assurance Representative signs or seals in principle upon confirming the contents filled in by the writer.
4 Company Name -1. If the submission of this issuance notification is due to the submission request notice, fill in the
To: 5 name of the organization for submission provided in [Notice Requiring Submission of Process
Contact Person Name 4 Quality Control Table] that corresponds to this issuance notification.
Address -2. Fill in the name of the person in charge in the receiving section in relation to parts in the
Process Quality Control Table if the notification is issued on their reasons.
6
Telephone No. 5 Fill in the name of the company and the contact person for inquiries from Honda.
7
lease place a circle in the box of your reason. 6 Fill in the address and phone number of the company.
Due to submission request notice (new/revised) 8 New # of original: Put a circle in the box that is most appropriate, and
Notification
Notification -1. circle New or Revised if the submission is due to the submission request notice.
Due to an arrangement with Mr./Ms_______ , Honda document Revised # of revisions made: 7
-2. Write the name of the person from Honda if the submission is due to arrangement made
Due to company reasons. between person from the company and Honda's representative.
Reason for issuing notification: 9 Circle New or Revised and

8 -1. fill in the number of the Process Quality Control Table submitted if New.
-2. fill in the number of revised areas in the Process Quality Control Table if Revised.
Part Number Part Name This notification takes effect 9 Fill in the reason for submitting this Process Quality Control Table.
from the delivery date
Honda -1. Fill in the part number in this Process Quality Control Table.
10 11 12 10 -2. Fill in the part number if there is a part number at the supplier that corresponds to Honda's
Supplier
from / (day/month) and a slash if there is not.
Comments Received by
Received 14 / / 11 Fill in the part name that corresponds to the part number.
13 on (month/day/year)
Returned by 12 Fill in the scheduled date for commencement of carry-in of the subject part in this notification.
Returned
on
15
/ /
13 For Honda use only (no entry required).
01121 Original to be retained until: / (month/year)

7/15
July 1, 2014
8.4 Process Quality Control Table (I) ( Form 3 ) 1/4

Form - 3 Entry Procedures (Y08111) Dept. prepared ( supplier or dept in charge.) Dept. checked.
Model Designation of parts
　HS　HA　HB　Others
Part Number Process Quality Control Table (Ⅰ) 　 Suzuka, Hamamatsu, Kumamoto,
Saitama Tochigi Pur
(Received)
Part Name
Approved by Confirmed by Created by 8
Process Flow Diagram Component Part Order List

Order Type
No Part Number Part Name Sup MFG
Supplier Name
RCVD
Flow process chart symbols shall conform to JIS Z8206 (composite symbol: combine sub-job symbol in main job symbol)
○ Machining □ Quantity inspection Flow line crossing Main job - machining /sub job -quality inspection.
○ Transfer ◇ Quality inspection Control classification in process sequence Main job - quality inspection /sub job - quantity inspection. ･･･ Initial Establishment 15 Approved by Checked by Prepared by
Dept Checked
▽ Storage ー Process sequence Code Date Revision Record Creation Division
05071 Route: dept. prepared => dept. checked => dept prepared.
Original to be retained until YYYY/MM
22
／23

8/15
July 1, 2014
8.5 Process Quality Control Table (I) ( Form -3 ) entry procedure

Model 1 Designation of parts
　
2 HS　HA　HB　Others
Part Number 3 Process Quality Control Table (Ⅰ) 5 Suzuka, Hamamatsu, Kumamoto,
7 Saitama, Tochigi, Pur.
(Received)
4 Approved Confirmed by Created by 8
Part Name
6 8
9. Process Flow Diagram

- Set 'lot formation criteria' within the range in which a product was or was
Component Part Order List
1 Enter the Part Classification No. (enter the name of the representative Part Classification considered to be produced under equal conditions. For example, by material Order Type
No. if there are more than one). No Part Number Part Name Supplier Name
charge, process setup change, or processing machine, etc. Sup MFG
2 Circle the designation mark in the "critical safety parts rank" in the drawing. - Set up a lot size based on a set production quantity per day in the process design
12 RCVD
3 Enter the part name shown in the drawing. Enter first three digits for the type number. calculated with the set product quantity for amortization, and the aforementioned
If there are multiple part classification no. or type no., one of the following may be taken for lot formation criteria (actual lot size may vary according to production plan). 10 11 12 13
parts that process sequence, quality characteristics, production conditions, etc. are the - For 'names of recording forms', fill in the names of forms in which the lot formation
same or similar.
and lot sizes are recorded.
-1. Include in the same field. -5. In case that symbols other than indicated in the process drawing symbol column are
-2. Prepare and attach a Process Quality Control Table (Appendix), List of Applied Parts. used, add such symbols and explanations in the margin.
Write "see List of Application (appendix) for part numbers" in the part number column. 10 Enter the serial number. For parts with the Process Quality Control Table, circle the serial
number that applies.
4 Enter the part name shown in the drawing.
5 Enter the name of the supplier and the responsible section. 11 Enter the part number and the part name shown in the drawing and the first three digits for
6 Signature or seal of the supplier's quality assurance representative or facility quality type number. Be reminded to use the part number from Honda (Honda's part number).
representative. Be reminded that all signatures and seals affixed at the time of
12 Cross out 'RCVD' for received parts in Component Order List field with a diagonal line.
establishment will remain and be printed out by the preparing section, if computers are
used to revise the content of this document. Circle the applicable item; 'SUP" for supplied by Honda or MFG for self-supplied parts.
13 Enter the name of the designated sub-supplier if this is 'SUP', or the supplier name if 'MFG'.
7 For Honda use only (no entry required) 14 Enter the establishment date in the western calendar. If revising the form for reasons other
than a new establishment, transcribe the establishment date of previous versions.
8 Signatures and signs made during time of establishment will be printed by the revising
section, if computers are used to revise the content of this document. 15 Enter "establishment".
16 Fill in a serial number each time revision is made. In the event that a new form is created or
revision column is rewritten due to short of revision field, the revision number is to be the
sequential to the last version. Implement identification to prevent misuse of previous
versions, and exercise control over and maintain previous versions in a manner that they are
9 Draw the process diagram from receipt of component parts to processing and shipment. easily retrievable when needed.
-1. Enter the process name in ( ), if it is performed at the supplier.

-2. Attach an additional form or an A3 size sheet if more space is needed. 17 Enter the date of revision in the western calendar.
-3. Other types of sheets can be attached if appropriate. 18 Write a summary of the revision. In case that the original or form format is to be renewed by
-4. Follow procedures below for lot control parts. the revision, write "original rewritten due to XX" (insert reasons).
a. Place a '●' to the left of appropriate process drawing code for lot formation process. 19 In the latest revision, sign or seal the names of supplier's quality assurance representative or
'Lot forming process' is "a process of forming and identifying a manufacturing lot facility quality representative. Be reminded that all signatures and seals affixed to previous
according to the priority of quality characteristics, process layout, equipment, versions will remain and be printed out by the preparing section, if computers are used to
process capability, etc. to track and control manufacturing records of parts". revise the content of this document.
b. For the process marked '●', write designed 'lot formation criteria and designated lot 20 For Honda use only (no entry required)
size' and "names of recording forms" in a square box to the right of the process
name. Signatures and signs of previous version will be printed by the revising section, if computers
(see below for reference). are used to revise the content of this document.
21 Enter the date, month and year after 15 years of issuance of production closing order.
22 Enter the page number using consecutive numbers for every part number provided in the
Designated lot size/lot formation criteria "Notice for Submission of Process Quality Control Table".
Names of recording forms 23 Enter total page count.
○ Machining □ Quantity inspecti on Flow line crossing Main job - machining /sub job -quality inspection. 16 17 18 19 20
○ Transfer ◇ Quality inspection Control classif ication in process sequence
Main job - quality inspection /sub job - quantity inspection. ･･･ 14 Initial Establishment 15 Approved by Chec ked by Prepared by
Dept
Checked
Original document retention period: 21 YY/MM
22
／
23

9/15
July 1, 2014
8.6 Process Quality Control Table (I) (Form -3) 3/4

Basic Drawing Symbol
Process Symbol
Number Symbol Description Remarks
Component Name
Process where shapes or
natures of raw materials,
1 Processing Processing
materials, parts or products
are transformed.
Diameter of the conveyance
symbol is 1/2 - 1/3 of that of the
Process where positions of
processing symbol.
raw materials, materials,
2 Conveyance Conveyance ○ parts or products are
can be used instead of ○.
However, this symbol does not
changed.
show the direction of
conveyance.
Process where raw
materials, materials, parts or
3 Storage
products are systematically
stored.
Stagnation
State where raw materials,
4 Retention materials, parts or products
are behind the schedule.
Process where volume or
quantity of raw materials,
Quantity materials, parts or products
5
Inspection are measured to compare
the results with standards
and to learn the difference.
Process where quality
Inspection characteristics of raw
materials, materials, parts or
products are tested to
Quality
6 compare the results with
Inspection
standards and to judge
ACCEPT or NOT ACCEPT
for lots, or GOOD or NOT
GOOD for parts.
Supplementary Drawing Symbol
Number Symbol Name Symbol Description Remarks
If order relation is unclear, add an arrow at

Order relations of component the end of the line or in between to specify
1 Streamline
processes. the direction. Intersection of the streamline
should be indicated with .
Control classification in
2 Classification
process sequence.
Omission of part of process

3 Omission
sequence.
Combined Symbol
When functions or states of two component processes exist in one component process, those component
process symbols can be combined. In such case, "main" component process symbol should be placed outside
and "sub" component process symbol inside. As for the conveyance symbol when combined, the symbol to be
used is .
Combined Symbol Description
Perform quantity inspection as well as quality
inspection primarily conducted.
Perform quality inspection as well as quantity
inspection primarily conducted.
Perform quantity inspection as well as
processing primarily conducted.
Perform conveyance as well as processing
primarily conducted.

10/15
July 1, 2014
8.7 Process Quality Control Table (I) ( Form -3 ) Entry Procedure 4/4
Model S5A Designation of parts HS　HA　HB　Others
Quality Assurance Division Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Part Number 4 2 6 5 0 S 5 A 0 0 0 H 1 Process Quality Control Table (Ⅰ) XXXXX Co., Ltd.
Suzuka, Hamamatsu, Kumamoto,
Saitama Tochigi Pur
(Received)
WHEEL ASSY REAR Approved by Confirmed by Created by ☐☐BL △△BL ○○BL ＊＊BL
Part Name
※Refer to Appendix "List of applied parts"
大西 KITAGAW A YAMAMOTO KAWAGUCHI NOZAW A HARADA
下田
Process System Diagram Driven

Component Part Order List
Tongued RR wheel Distance Wheel
sprocket Oil seal
Balance weight Tire washer Retainer hub Bearing collar rim Spoke nipple Order Type
1 B1 C１ No Part Number Part Name Sup MFG

Supplier Name
Acceptance Acceptance Acceptance Acceptance RCVD
inspection inspection inspection inspection
- type, - size, - type, - type, ① 42651-S5A-010 HUB,REAR,WHEEL ○ Chuo Kogyo
appearance appearance appearance appearance
2 42652-S5A-000 RETAINER,RR,BRG ○ Shinjuku SS
Hand Cart Hand Cart Hand Cart Cart Forklift Hand ③ 42653-S5A-000 RIM,RR,WHEEL ○ Koto SS
Cart Cart
4 42654-S5A-000 WASHER, TUNGUED ○ Kita Kogyo
2
● BRG & seal press fit 100
100 units/
qty / shift
shift 5 42655-S5A-000 COLLAR, DISTANCE ○ Kita Kogyo
　　- Press fit area assembly
(record form name)
6 42656-S5A-000 FLANGE, DRIVEN ○ Itabashi SS
Hand 7 42657-S5A-000 TIRE, RR ○ Nerima Tire
3 Retainer tightening & rivet punch
8 94001-12000 NUT,HEX,12mm ○ Kita Kogyo
　　- tightening torque, riveting condition 9 42658-S5A-000 SLEEVE, RR,AXLE ○ Toshima Kogyo
⑩ 42659-S5A-000 SPROCKET DRIVEN ○ Osaki SS
Conveyer 11 (This is just a sample and further omitted)
4 Sprocket assembly
　　 - Torque
5 Tongued washer rivet

　　- riveting condition
6
Wheel assembly
　　- assembly composition, appearance
7 100 units / shift
● Run out adjustment
(record form name)
　　- run out, spoke tightening
8 Tire assembly
　　- balance mark, nut tightening
9 Air filling
　　- run out, air pressure
● 10 Balancing 100 units/ shift

　　- weight installation (record form name)
condition
● 11 Completion inspection 100 units/ shift
　　- run out, assembly, (record form name)
appearance
Conveyer
*Symbols other than process drawing symbols

12 Release 　　　　　　●: lot formation process
○ Machining □ Quantity inspection Flow line crossing Main job - machining /sub job -quality inspection.
○ Transfer ◇ Quality inspection Control classification in process sequence Main job - quality inspection /sub job - quantity inspection. ･･･ Initial Establishment 15 Approved by Checked by Prepared by
Dept Checked
Original to be retained until YYYY/MM
1
／
5

11/15
July 1, 2014
8.8 Process Quality Control Table (II) (Form 4) 1/3

(Form - 4)
M F G O rd e r
Production Condition Control

F a ilu re M o d e
Quality Characteristics
C ritic a l Ite m
C ritic a l Ite m
Process Name
Submission
Equipment Name frequency (Equipment, die, fail safe equipment, oil pressure, voltage, temperature, and others) Schematic Drawing
Person in Check Data of Data Person in Check Data
(Supplier Name) № Control Item Specification charge (PIC)
Frequency Control Item Control Value charge (PIC)
Frequency
Method Format Method Format
01121 ↑
Complete vehicle's Failure Mode Classification : 1. Driving function failure, 2. Turning function failure, 3. Stopping function failure, 4. Guarding function failure, 5. Insulation function failure,
6. Protection function failure, 7. Exhaust gas control function failure, 8. Identification function failure

12/15
July 1, 2014
8.9 Process Quality Control Table (II) (Form 4) Entry Procedure 2/3
(Form - 4) Entry procedure

Failure Mode
Process Quality Control Table (II)
Critical Item
Critical Item
MFG Order
Process Name Control of Manufacturing Conditions

Quality Characteristics Submission (facilities, die, fail safe equipment, oil pressure, voltage, temperature, and others)
Facility Name Schematic Drawing
frequency of
(Supplier Name) Check Data Check Data
№ Control Item Specification PIC Frequency Data Control Item Control Value PIC Frequency
Method Format Method Format
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳
① Enter in correspondence with operation numbers in process system diagram. If it is an outsourcing process, circle the ⑤ Enter a sequence number for each process.
manufacturing order number.
⑥ Enter a quality control item. (e.g. appearance, diameter, surface roughness, hardness, weight etc.)
② Enter the name of the process or machine tools. If it is an outsourced process, enter the supplier's name with ⑦ Enter reference values or specification limits and a unit (If it can't be quantified, enter limits or samples, etc.).
parentheses. Use SI units as a rule. When using a conventional unit at the same time, put it in parentheses ( ).
③ Perform FMEA etc., and enter in this column the applicable no. from "Failure Mode Classification for complete unit" ⑧ Enter the job title of the person in charge of control items. (E.g. PIC of inspection, operator, etc. )
(equivalent to the meaning of failure of important functions as described in HES A 3050) at the bottom margin of this form.
⑨ Enter the check method of a control item or the name of the equipment used. Enter the check method used for control
The supplier and Honda coordinate and build consensus on the failure mode classification, if necessary. items and thename of equipment used.
The "Failure Mode"means the state of a vehicle failure detected by analysis such as FMEA, etc.
The classfication of each failure mode is defined as the follows. ⑩ Enter the frequency of checking control items.
Example: n=10/lot, n=5/day, 100 % Inspection, n=3/at start-up, n=3/resumption
(1) Running function failure: sudden running or sudden non-running against driver's will. ("per work resumption" means every resumption of work which has been put on hold or stopped due to setup,
(2) Turning function failure: non-turning or turning against driver's will. operational break, etc.)
(3) Stopping function failure: non-stopping or stopping against driver's will. Take a lot-size change into consideration, when setting the frequency of checking in units of lot, day, etc.
(4) Guard function failure: splashing, or contact with high temperature/rotating parts against user's will. ⑪ Enter the name of control record forms. (e.g. check sheet, inspection check sheet, control chart, etc.)
(5) Insulation function failure: receiving an electrical shock against user's will. ⑫ Enter the frequency of submitting inspection criteria for parts issued by Honda and data requested by Honda.
(6) Protective function failure: unsatisfactory protective function for passengers and users. ⑬ Same as ④
(7) Exhaust gas controlling function failure: unsatisfactory exhaust gas controlling function. ⑭ Enter a control item (e.g. temperature, eccentricity, speed, machining allowance, etc.) for well-maintaining specification
(8) Identification function failure: unsatisfactory visibility and identification display function. limits specified in the quality characteristics field.
④ Enter the number of the item appears first on the list if the there are more than one that apply, or place a circle, etc. on the ⑮ Enter the standard value and units of measure for the parameter selected in the control item column. Use SI units as a
number to distinguish it as important item. rule. When using a conventional unit at the same time, put it in parentheses ( ).
The supplier and Honda perform adjustments on circled items as necessary. Set the control method in a way that enables ⑯ Enter the job title of the person in charge of controlling of control items.
the monitoring of trend control, etc. for quality characteristics and manufacturing condition control.
⑰ Enter the check method for control items or the name of the equipment used.
⑱ Enter the frequency of checking control items.
-1. An item which has a mark "Q" on its product drawings, specifications and etc. Example: once/hr, per work resumption, once/shift, etc. ("per work resumption" means every resumption of work
-2. A control item which directly affects the inspection item with item importance A defined in the inspection criteria. which has been put on hold or stopped due to setup, operational break, etc.)
-3. An item related to quality characteristics and manufacturing conditions that may result in a defect of an important ⑲ Enter the name of the form used manage control items (e.g. check sheet, check list, daily report, record sheet, etc. ).
function (such as running, turning, stopping, guard, insulation, protection, exhaust gas controlling or identification).
⑳ Provide a sketch of an area of the part to be processed, delivery destination, etc., as necessary.
-4. An item for whichrecall, etc. was taken in the past.
Note: If the "Process Quality Control Table (II)" is prepraed per process, create a separate entry for each of main and sub
-5. An item for which a focused control is judged to be required based on the process capability evaluation, the past procecss flows. If there are more than one sub process flows, make an entry for each sub process flow.
quality performance (market quality information, in-house quality information, in-process failure), the manufacturing
quality criteria, etc.
01121 ↑
Failure mode classification for completed unit: 1. Driving function failure, 2. Turning function failure, 3. Stopping function failure, 4. Guarding function failure, 5. Insulation function failure, 6. Protection function failure, 7. Exhaust g

13/15
July 1, 2014
8.10 Process Quality Control Table (II) ( Form -4 ) Entry Procedure 3/3
(Form - 4) Entry procedure

Process Name Control of Manufacturing Conditions (facilities, die, fail safe equipment, oil
MFG Order
pressure, voltage, temperature, and others)
Failure Mode
Facility Name
Critical Item
Critical Item
Submi ssion
Person in frequency of
Schematic Drawing
Check Data Person i n Check Data
(Supplier Name) № Control Item Specification charge Frequency Format
Data Control Item Control Value charge (PIC) Frequency Format
(PIC) Method Method
1 PIC of Identi fi cati on Inspection
1 Type 42651-AB1-010 acceptance documents n=5/Lot check sheet
Wheel hub
Acceptance 0 mm
2 Beari ng bore di ameter φ35 -0.018
same as above Cyl i nder cage same as above same as above
Inspection
0 mm same as
3 Oil seal bore diameter φ35 -0.10
same as above same as above
above
same as above
+0.2 mm
4 Drum diameter φ200 0 same as above Caliper cage same as above same as above
Run out
5 Drum di ameter run out 0.05mm or less same as above measuring same as above same as above
devi ce
6S Roughness
2 O 6 Shoe surface roughness
▽▽▽
　or less same as above
standard pi ece
Boundary
7 Airplane cloth appearance same as above same as above
sample
100%
Leave two lines blank, taking into

consideration items to be added
later. Do the same for the rest.
2 Bearing & Bearing press fit At 0.2 mm or l ower from Depth testi ng 2.94±0.098MPa Oil pressure During Check
3 O 1 case surface Operator devi ce n=1/50 O Oil pressure R side Operator gauge operation
Oil seal press fit position (30±1kgf) sheet
Oil seal press Inspection once a 3.92±0.098MPa
O 2 same as above same as above same as above same as above
check sheet month O Oil pressure L side same as above same as above same as above same as above
Honda 2ton oil fit position (40±1kg/c㎡)
pressure press Assemble Must be same as Press fit jig Speci al
3 same as above Visual above 0.01 or less same as above
testi ng device 1/Month same as above
machine distance collar assembled concentricity
Press fit jig
0.005/40 same as above same as above same as above same as above
Ito Giken Industrial perpendicularity
Co., Ltd.
　 Person i n
Identi fi cati on
B1 1 Type 35 x 47 x 8 charge of
documents n=5/cart
Oil seal acceptance
Acceptance No di rt adhesi on, no

2 Appearance contami nation
same as above Visual
Inspection
Amount of grease Grease must be fi l led al l same as
3 filled on the lip around
above
Person i n
Identi fi cati on
C1 1 Type 6200 charge of
documents n=10/cart
Bearing acceptance
Acceptance No dirt adhesion, no

2 Appearance contamination
same as above Visual same as above
Inspection
Amount of Grease must be same as
3 filled all around
above
grease filled
01121 ↑
Failure Mode Classification by Complete vehicle team : 1. Driving function failure, 2. Turning function failure, 3. Stopping function failure, 4. Guarding function failure, 5. Insulation function failure, 2
6. Protection function failure, 7. Exhaust gas control function failure, 8. Identification function failure 5

14/15
July 1, 2014
8.11 Process Quality Control Table (Appendix) (Form -5)

(Form - 5)
Process Quality Control Table (Appendix) Created
List of Applied Parts by
Revision
No. Part Number Part Name Remarks
code
01121 Original to be retained until　: / (year/month)
This appendix is to be attached on top of Process Quality Control Table (I) when there are two or more
parts that the table is required to be applied to.

15/15
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall examine and agree the proposed packaging style for delivery of parts.
2) The supplier shall determine and obtain agreement from Honda on packaging style for
delivery of parts, and preserve the conformity of product during handling, delivery, and
storage from the time of shipment from the supplier to the time of use by Honda.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A state of parts in a container or on a cart to be shipped out
1 Delivery packaging
from a supplier to a manufacturing plant of Honda.
3 Requirements
3.1 Delivery Packaging Preparation
3.1.1 Selection of Subject Parts
The supplier shall, in order to put forward a proposal on delivery packaging to Honda,
select subject parts that fall into the following categories.
1) Parts that require attention to delivery packaging to maintain quality.
2) Parts that require attention to delivery method and delivery packaging due to
their shape, weight, etc.
3) Parts that require special protection and security against theft or for
confidentiality.
4) Other parts required by Honda.
3.1.2 Arrangement of delivery packaging
The supplier shall, with consideration to the following items, make an arrangement
for delivery packaging.
1) Damage to parts (breakage, scratch, deform, tear, loose, detached, stain).
2) Deterioration of parts (swell, rust, discoloration, color fading, hardening,
softening).
3) Collapse or protrusion of parts.
4) Interference (between parts, parts and container, etc.)
5) Shock protection (protection material, dunnage, partition)
6) Identification (display location, clarity: misuse prevention, display of lot and
content information, etc, first-in, first-out.)
7) Environment such as water, heat, air, light, dust, foreign particles, etc.
8) Synchronization with Honda’s production line.
9) Transfer of parts at the supplier’s site (consideration to size and weight limits for
the lift, elevator, conveyer, etc.).
10) Workability (easiness in taking out, weight, easiness in holding, misassembly
prevention)
11) Environment protection (reuse, recycle, returnable).
12) Personnel safety (projection, pinching, etc.).
13) Efficiency of loading and transportation of parts.
14) Prevention of past problems from recurring.
15) Regulations and policies with respect to containers of parts and products.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd

1/6
July 1, 2014
3.1.3 Delivery Packaging Specification

3.1.3.1 The supplier shall, in reference to section 7 “Delivery Packaging
Specification Form”, prepare a “Delivery Packaging Specification Form” or
create an equivalent form, and submit to Honda.
3.1.3.2 The supplier shall, if any instruction is given by Honda in regard to the
“Delivery Packaging Specification Form” follow the instruction.
3.1.4 Delivery Packaging Verification Meeting
3.1.4.1 The supplier shall, if so requested by Honda, build a container or cart
sample in accordance with the “Delivery Packaging Specification” and
participate in a delivery packaging verification meeting.
3.1.4.2 The supplier shall, for issues raised at a delivery packaging verification
meeting, carry out measures and revise the “Delivery Packaging Specification
Form “by the date specified by Honda.
3.1.5 Production of Containers and Carts
The supplier shall accommodate a container or cart in accordance with “Delivery
Packaging Specification Form”.
3.2 Improvement of Delivery Packaging During Mass Production
The supplier shall, if the need of improvement of delivery packaging arises, create a new
“Delivery Packing Style Specification Form”, submit to Honda, and make such
improvements in delivery packaging. However, no new “Delivery Packaging Specification
Form” is required if such improvements are not related to the matters agreed upon with
Honda in the previously issued “Delivery Packaging Specification Form”.
3.3 Control of Returnable Containers and Carts
The supplier shall define inspection methods including procedures, frequency, subject
items, etc. to control containers and carts that are used repeatedly.
4 Key Point
1) Containers and carts shall be identified with the name of the owner i.e. company name

2/6
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
Supplier Honda Contact
Determine parts requiring a delivery packaging

specification to be made taking into consideration the
follow ing:
- Quality maintenance
- Restriction of shapes, w eight, carry-in
methods and others
- Burglar proof, maintaining confidentiality
- Requirement from Honda
- Improvement of existing delivery packaging.
- Others
Review packaging style of parts
Create and submit Delivery 　　 Selection

Pre-production Stage
Packaging Specification Form

Deliv ery Packaging
Specification Form
Not
Prototyping required
procedure Judgment of
necessity of Material
Prototyping of containers and carts
packing style Service
verification Division
Hold a meeting to verify delivery packaging. Required

(verify part protection, workability, etc.)
NG OK
Material
Carry out measures against problems Resubmission Service
Approval of Delivery Packaging
exposed. Revise and resubmit Delivery Division
Specification Form
Packaging Specification Form
Deliv ery Packaging

Specification Form
Create containers and carts

Production Stage
Inspect and use the containers and

carts

3/6
July 1, 2014
7 Forms
7.1 Delivery Packaging Specification Form (entry procedure)
Supplier Code
１ Tel
３３ Fax
２ Approved by Prepared by
Apply Model
Supplier　Name
Part Number ３５ Delivery Packaging Specification Form ３４
(modified, new, others) Issue Date
３７３５３６
Part Name ４ Control No.
Size W T Size W T
Current part ６７ New/Modified part １６１７
L/W/H Kg L/W/H Kg
Address Address
Refer to Entry Procedure-B
８１８１９ Results by sections concerted. ３７

Section/signature Comments
　OK/NG
　OK/NG
２０２１２７
１１１２
Auxiliary Drawing
materials
Y N
indication
Y N Material ２２　OK/NG
Size W T Kg New/Modified Size W T Kg
Current package ９２３
L/W/H T-WT Kg package L/W/H T-WT Kg
Cushioning １０ Quantity qty Dunnage Material Quantity units
Carry-in route １４ Distance Km Carry-in route Distance Km 　OK/NG
Q1. Will container and/or cart
現行容器 be newly made?
１３２４２５２６２８２９
(1) Yes (2) No (3) Modified
Review
process
３０
１５３２ Judgement
Q2. Is material of dunnage
changed? Honda Motor Co., Ltd. ３７ Fact
(1) Yes (2) No Material Service
Division, Honda
３１３７
３７
Document Classfication Code Retention Period of Original : 5 years Expairation : YY/DD

３７

4/6
July 1, 2014
7.2 Delivery Packaging Specification Form (entry procedure)

No. Entry procedure
1 Enter the supplier code.
2 Enter the name of your company.
3 Enter the part number subject to change (or new part number for new parts).
4 Enter the part name subject to change (or new parts name for new parts).
Enter the name of the applicable model. Prior to entry, obtain proper information from
5
material service section of the delivery destination.
6 Enter the size of current parts (measurements).
7 Enter the weight of a unit of the current parts.
8 Attach a picture of the parts.
9 Enter the size of the container currently used (measurements).
Enter the type of dunnage currently used in the container (e.g.：partition, polyurethane
10
dunnage/foam, mirror mat and etc.).
11 Enter the weight of a unit of the container currently used.
Enter the total weight of the currently used container with parts loaded.
12 [The total weight equals the weight of a container plus the weight of parts loaded to the
maximum capacity of the container.]
13 Enter maximum capacity of the container currently used.
Enter the names of major highways, relay points and the total distance from the
14
production plant of current parts (please start with the location of the plant).
Attach a picture of the container currently used (attach a picture that shows
15
specifications).
16 Enter the length, width and height of new parts subject to change.
17 Enter the weight of a single unit of the parts (new) subject to change.
Enter changes to be made to the current parts (new parts).
18
(If there is no major change, or remains unchanged, cross out with a diagonal line.)
19 Attach a picture of the parts subject to change (new parts).
Circle the appropriate mark (“Y” or “N”) regarding auxiliary materials of new parts
20
subject to change (e.g.: caps, plugs, plastic bags and etc.).
Circle the appropriate mark (“Y” or “N”) regarding drawing indications for the usage of
21
auxiliary materials.
Enter the name of auxiliary material of new parts subject to change (e.g.: plastic,
22
polyvinyl chloride, rubbers and etc.).
Enter the size of the container by length, width and height for new parts subject to
23
change.
24 Enter the dunnage used for the container of new parts subject to change.
25 Enter the material of dunnage used for the container of new parts subject to change.
Enter the name of major highways, relay place-name and the total distance from the
26
production plant of parts subject to change (please start with the location of the plant).
27 Enter the weight of a container to be used for new parts subject to change.
Enter the total weight of the container to be used for new parts with the parts loaded.
28 [The total weight equals the weight of a container plus the weight of parts loaded to the
maximum capacity of the container]
29 Enter the maximum capacity of the container used for new parts subject to change.

5/6
July 1, 2014
No. Entry procedure

Enter changes made to the current containers (new container).
30
Enter changes made to the current wadding.
31
Attach a picture of the changed container (new). (Cross out with a diagonal line if
32
remains unchanged.)
33 Enter the phone number of the contact person in your company.
34 Enter the facsimile number of the contact person in your company.
35 Signature of your company’s authorized representative for approval.
36 Signature of your company’s authorized representative for preparation.

6/6
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall require suppliers of problem parts, which were found in the pre-production
stage and its cause was considered attributable to the supplier, to conduct analysis and
take countermeasure against the cause.
2) The supplier shall conduct analysis and take countermeasure for the cause of the
problem in accordance with a request from Honda and report the results to Honda. For
problems in the pre-production stage, it is important that measures for the problem be
preferentially implemented and results be evaluated for effectiveness by the subsequent
pre-production trial event.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A drawing of parts drawn and issued by a supplier, which
Honda had outsourced the design, development, and
1 Supplier drawing manufacturing to, in accordance with the basic requirements
of preliminary specifications provided by Honda, or a “parts
supplier’s drawing” which referred to as a supplier’s drawing.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall, if a problem with parts delivered from the supplier is found at Honda during
the pre-production stage, and if the supplier is so informed by Honda, promptly take measures
that include prevention of problem recurrence.
3.1 The supplier shall undertake analysis of problem parts, investigate the cause of the
problem, and report to Honda’s new model section.
3.2 If the cause of the problem is attributable to the supplier’s drawings, etc., the supplier
shall issue a “Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure Request Form]“ in accordance
with 【SQM 4-6-1 Countermeasure Request Form】and request necessary changes to
drawings, etc. to Honda (new model preparation section).
3.3 If the cause of the problem is attributable to the suppliers’ manufacturing processes, the
supplier shall seek improvement in manufacturing processes following consultation with
Honda (new model preparation section). If so requested by Honda, the supplier shall
report to Honda (new model preparation section) the result of the improvement
using ”Analysis Record [Analysis Report]” in【SQM 4-5 Corrective Action Report】or
equivalent forms.
Analysis Record [Analysis Report] or equivalent

1 10 years
form
Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure
2 5 years
Request Form]
2) SQM 4-6-1 Countermeasure Request Form

1/1
3-5-1 Parts Inspection Criteria
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall issue Parts Inspection Criteria to suppliers to verify quality characteristics of
parts to which verification is mandated by laws and regulations.
2) The supplier shall report inspection results with respect to the quality characteristics of
parts specified in Parts Inspection Criteria.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Inspection Criteria [System/Device and Parts], which set forth
Parts Inspection
1 acceptance criteria to be applied to inspection of individual
Criteria
constituent parts of a product.
3 Requirements
3.1 Receipt of Parts Inspection Criteria
The supplier who received Parts Inspection Criteria from Honda shall review
requirements for inspection and reflect them in Process Quality Control Table, etc.
3.1.1 Matters Specified in Parts Inspection Criteria
Major matters specified in Parts Inspection Criteria shall be as follows.
1) Part number/ part name
2) Inspection item
3) Item importance
4) Quality judgment criteria
5) Inspection method
6) Inspection plan (Honda’s inspection plan and frequency)
7) Data format
8) Inspection section (Honda’s section to which the result is submitted)
3.1.1.1 Severity ranking
Honda shall assign an item importance to each inspection item, which indicates
the degree of severity of respective quality characteristics. Definition of item
importance and its criteria are as follows.
Item Definition
Importance
Conditions which are judged to pose a serious threat to human
lives such as the following when a problem with the structure,
equipment, or function of the product occurs.
1) Condition that disables vehicle operation (run, steer, or
A stop).
2) Condition that associated with electrification, burn, or injury.
3) Condition that associated with fire.
4) Condition that associated with pollution.
5) Condition that disables protection of vehicle occupants.
Conditions other than described in A and that cause significant
loss of function or merchantability as the product when a
B
problem with the performance, function, or structure of parts
occur.
C Conditions that do not comply with either A or B above.

1/3
July 1, 2014
3.2 Inspection
3.2.1 Reflection in Process Quality Control Table
The supplier shall confirm that quality characteristics and inspection frequency
specified in Inspection Criteria are included in process quality control table, and
reflect the frequency of data submission to Honda in process quality control table.
3.2.2 Implementation of Inspection
The supplier shall implement inspections in accordance with process quality control
table.
3.2.3 Record of Inspection Results
The results of inspection shall be recorded and stored in the Inspection Check Sheet,
etc.
3.2.4 Sub-Supplier Management
If inspection items specified in Inspection Criteria are performed by sub-suppliers,
the supplier shall collect the inspection results from such sub-suppliers and provide
Honda with the results.
3.2.5 Submission of Inspection Check Sheet
The supplier shall submit the inspection results to Honda at the frequency specified.
The inspection results provided by sub-suppliers shall be included in the Inspection
Check Sheet, etc. to be submitted to Honda.
Record of inspection results (Inspection Check
1 15 years
Sheet, etc. for submission)

2/3
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
Procurment
Part Inspection Criteria div
Est. Revise/Issue
Pur. div
Verify Part
Insp.Criteri
Inspection setting
Process quality control table
Prep. operation control doc.
Inspection equipment
Inspection
Confirm Procurment
Submit Inspection results
Control records div
inspection
report, etc.

3/3
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall, if a supplier produces limit samples of parts for which acceptability is
determined by visual inspection, etc., examine and approve such samples.
2) The supplier shall control limit samples approved by Honda, and judge the acceptability
of manufactured parts for quality.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A sample of parts which demonstrates quality limits for
1 Limit sample
conformance or nonconformance.
3 Requirements
3.1 Preparation of Limit Samples
3.1.1 The supplier shall, if it is difficult to quantitatively define or explain the
characteristics required for parts, produce limit samples at the direction of Honda or
at its discretion.
3.1.2 The supplier shall, if necessary, identify areas showing the limits by circling with a
line or marking with an arrow, and clearly identify the limit sample by attaching a tag,
etc.
3.1.3 The supplier shall produce limit samples prior to the transition to mass production
stage (refer to【SQM 3-9 Transition to Mass Production】).
3.1.4 The supplier shall produce limit samples for posting at the site, based on the limit
sample agreed upon with Honda if necessary. Honda may require a duplicate
sample for its possession.
3.2 Limit Sample Control Forms
3.2.1 The supplier shall create a limit sample control form in accordance with the
example provided in section 7, however, the format may be changed depending on
the type, size or shape of the limit sample.
The following items shall be included in the control form at a minimum.
1) Date of production of the limit sample
2) Control number
3) Inspection items (scratch, color, roughness, unevenness, wrinkle, shape, etc.)
4) Applicable part number or part name
5) Effective period
(Time-dependent change of limit samples shall be taken into consideration
when establishing an effective period.)
6) Signature field
3.2.2 The supplier shall issue a limit sample control form per limit sample, include the
signature of the person responsible, and submit the form to Honda with the limit
sample.
3.3 Consensus on Limit Sample
3.3.1 The supplier shall build consensus on limit samples with Honda prior to the
transition to mass production (refer to【SQM 3-9 Transition to Mass Production】). No
parts, which are to be examined with limit samples, shall be released until consensus
is achieved with Honda.
3.3.2 The supplier shall, if a limit sample produced by Honda is provided, adopt the limit
sample. However, the supplier may discuss the level of limit sample with Honda as
necessary.

1/4
July 1, 2014
3.4 Maintenance and control of limit samples

3.4.1 The supplier shall retain limit samples considering damage, deterioration, etc.
3.4.2 The supplier shall, if duplicates of the limit sample are made, number the
duplicates and control with a ledger.
3.4.3 The supplier shall review and revise limit samples and their effective periods.
Where changes are made, the suppliers shall rebuild a consensus on the subject
matter with Honda.
3.4.4 The supplier shall periodically verify that limit samples are retained in the same
condition as agreed with Honda
No Type of Record Retention Period
1 Until a production closing
Limit sample control form
order is issued.
2 Until a production closing
Limit sample duplicate ledger
order is issued.

2/4
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
New model
Issue instructions for
supplier decision promotion
preparation section
Prepare limit sample

Pre-production stage
Prep. limit sample

control form
New model
promotion
Approved Agreed OK section
Procurement
NG quality section
Duplicate a sample for

displaying limits
Create a duplicate ledger
Create new, revise or 　・extend the effective period

update/renew/extend limit　・criteria change, etc.
samples Revise
control
Production stage
OK Procurement
Approved Agreed quality section
NG
Duplicate a sample for

displaying limits
Create a duplicate ledger

3/4
July 1, 2014
7 Forms
An example of a limit sample control form is shown below, however other forms may be
accepted on the condition that all necessary information set forth in section 3.2.1.are
included.
Example of a limit sample control form
Limit Sample Control Form Date of Preparation
Control Number YYYY/ MM/ DD
Inspection item
(scratch, color, roughness,

unevenness, shape, etc.)
Applicable part
Part name
number
Effective period From 　 YYYY/MM/DD　　To 　YYYY/MM/DD
Honda Motor., Co., Ltd. Supplier name

(enter the name of section ) ( enter name of section)
1. Do not use limit samples that have passed the effective period for the purpose of inspection.
2. If it is necessary to use limit samples continuously, notify Honda and file for a continued use of
the samples.

4/4
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda may coordinate and build consensus with suppliers on the specification of
textures of grain and color that cannot be specified on the drawing (specifications
included).
2) The supplier shall clarify requirements to be coordinated in response to a request from
Honda for textures of grain and color, of parts.
2 Definitions
No. Terms Definitions
Grain Uneven pattern of part surface by the arrangement of
1
particulate constituents.
Grain process supplier A supplier specified by Honda who performs grain embossing
2
on the part mold.
3 Color Color of part exterior
4 Color application plate Color master set forth in HES Z 0013.
Approved actual part A part sample with which color was agreed with Honda.
5
sample
3 Requirements
3.1 Grain Adjustment
3.1.1 The supplier shall verify the type and scope of grain embossing by drawing
(specification included).
3.1.2 The supplier shall, in accordance with a request from Honda, attend a “grain go
meeting” held by Honda and coordinate the direction and depth of grain as well as
manufacturability with Honda and its grain process supplier. Honda shall record the
results of the coordination in the “Instructions for Grain Direction and Grained Finish
Depth” and the supplier shall keep a copy of the results.
3.1.3 The supplier shall, after the receipt of “Grain Instruction”, produce part molds in
accordance with the agreement specified in “Grain Direction and Depth Instructions”.
Molds shall be produced in a manner that the delivery of parts will be in time for the
appointed delivery date.
3.2 Color Adjustment
3.2.1 The supplier shall confirm drawings (specifications included) for the color assigned
to parts, fill in a “color-matching reference chart” found in section 6 or equivalent
form with necessary information, and submit it to Honda.
The supplier shall request Honda a color application plate for colors newly adopted.
3.2.2 The supplier shall examine colors by visual and by measurement using color
measuring equipment (colorimeter, etc.). Record evaluation results including visual
checks and measurements in the “color matching reference chart” or equivalent form
set forth in section 6.
3.2.3 The supplier shall, in response to a request from Honda, attend a “color
coordination meeting”, check the color of parts manufactured with color application
plate, and record the results of the check in the “color matching reference chart” or
equivalent form. The “color matching reference chart” or equivalent form shall be
presented if so requested by Honda.

1/3
July 1, 2014
3.2.4 The supplier shall sign and date on the approved actual parts for which the final
agreement was entered into with Honda, and maintain the approved actual part
sample in a manner that prevents discoloration or damage.
1 Color application plate Revise as needed
2 Until a closing order for the
Approved actual part sample
production is issued.

2/3
July 1, 2014
6 Form: color matching reference chart

Event Date Part Origin Evaluator
Color Matching Reference Chart

Color
Part Grain Gloss Material Coloring (coating) Supplier Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation First Evaluation Second Third Evaluation
No. C/C Part Name Forming or Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation Judg Evaluation
Number No. Value (grade) Method Supplier Criteria
coating ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details ment Details
Hue
Lightnes
1 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
2 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
3 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
4 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
5 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
6 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
7 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
8 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
9 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
10 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
11 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
12 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
13 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
14 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
15 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
16 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
17 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
18 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
19 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
20 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
21 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
22 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
23 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
24 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
25 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
26 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
27 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
28 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
29 Saturatio
Luster
Hue
Lightnes
30 Saturatio
Luster

3/3
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide basic requirements for measuring and monitoring equipment for
suppliers to use.
2) The supplier shall define installation and control methods of measuring and monitoring
equipment in accordance with the requirements specified by Honda to assure the results
of measuring and monitoring of parts delivered to Honda.
2 Definitions
No. Terms Definition
A general term for measuring instruments (gauge, measuring
instrument, standard, etc.), testing device, testers, analytical
equipments, etc., including related software of computer
Measuring systems.
1
equipment
For definitions of terms used for measuring instruments, testers,
analytical equipment, etc., refer to JIS Z 8103 “Glossary of terms
used in measurement”.
Equipment to use to “monitoring: the observation of a system (all
or part) to verify proper performance and detect improper
Monitoring performance. Actual observation is made by measuring one or
2
device more variants of the system, and subsequent comparison of the
value obtained from such measurements with the specified
value.” in 24103, section 4.1 of JIS B0155.
A material used for inspecting instrumental errors of equipment
Reference (weight, block gauge, reference solution, etc.),whose
3
material physical/chemical amount is certified (actually measured values
are indicated) based on the material examination results.
A pre-use check of equipment for appearance and function
4 Routine check
performed by the using department of the applicable equipment.
An inspection of equipment for problems with the term and
5 Regular check
extent specified.
Regular Periodic inspection of equipment for appearance and function.
6
inspection
A process of establishing the relationship between the value
7 Calibration measured by the measuring device and its true value with
standards and reference materials to correct deviations.
3 Requirements
3.1 Assurance of Measurement Validity
The supplier shall, when performing inspection, measurement, testing or monitoring, etc.,
to assure the quality required for parts, use equipment in which accuracy, function and
precision are ensured in accordance with the following.
3.2 Accuracy of Measurements
3.2.1 The supplier shall, when selecting equipment, consider traceability to international
or national standards.
3.2.2 The supplier shall calibrate or verify equipment against measurement standards
traceable to international or national measurement standards. Where no such
standards exist, reference materials used for calibration or verification shall be
recorded.

1/2
July 1, 2014
3.3 Check, Inspection and Calibration

3.3.1 The supplier shall establish a schedule for regular check, regular inspection, and
calibration to ensure precision, function, and accuracy of equipment, perform checks
and regular inspections and calibrations of equipment accordingly, and maintain
records.
3.3.2 The supplier shall establish a schedule for regular check, regular inspection, and
calibration to ensure precision, function, and accuracy of equipment, perform checks
and regular inspections and calibrations of equipment accordingly, and maintain
records.
3.3.3 The supplier shall identify equipment to enable the calibration status to be
determined.
3.4 Reaction Plan to Abnormal Conditions
3.4.1 The supplier shall, if any abnormality is found in the equipment, stop immediately
use of the equipment and take remedial measures.
3.4.2 The supplier shall, if any repairs are made to the equipment, recalibrate prior to
resume use of the equipment as necessary.
3.4.3 The supplier shall, when equipment is found not to conform to requirements,
evaluate effect to parts, safety and pollution prevention, and if applicable, request
related sections to take appropriate actions.
3.4.4 Records of the nature of the abnormality and any subsequent actions taken shall
be maintained.
4 Key point
1) Determine the frequency of checks and calibrations based on previous records, data, etc.
2) If there are more than two units of the same type of equipment and normally one unit is
reserved as a spare, check the setting, etc. at the time of use when using a spare unit.
3) Equipment shall be safeguarded from adjustments that would invalidate the
measurement result.
4) Criteria for judging the adequacy of equipment shall be approved by qualified personnel.
5) If wears or changes due to aging affect the validity of measurement, draw up plans for
checks and repairs of consumable parts (area) in view of the frequency of use, duration
of life, cycle of replacement, etc.
6) In case of any abnormality or nonconformity to requirements is found during use, check,
or calibration of equipment, stop immediately use of the equipment, and verify conformity
of parts previously measured by the equipment.
1 Routine maintenance records 1 year

Periodical check and calibration
2 15 years
records
3 Repair records 15 years after abolishment
2) JIS Z 8103
3) JIS B 0155

2/2
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide suppliers with requirements of operation control documents, which
the suppliers make available to their operators, in order for the suppliers’ manufacturing
processes to be in a controlled state.
2) The supplier shall formulate operation control documents in accordance with
requirements prescribed by Honda, provide to its operators and utilize for training.
2 Definitions
No Term Definition
1 Operation A generic term for documents to provide operators with directions for
control work sequences, set-up condition, etc. in order for each of the
documents fabrication, assembly, inspection, equipment maintenance,
transportation, and administrative processing, etc. to be controlled per
process, product, operation, etc. Documents such as operation
standards, condition control tables, specifications, signs or displays
showing photographs or illustrations to caution, and check/inspection
standards for inspecting equipment are included.
2 Operation A set of documents that describe requirements and procedures to be
standard followed such as illustrations of work, work sequences, jigs and tools,
quality characteristics and standards, operation key points, inspection
methods, parts to be used, facilities, actions to be taken when
abnormality occurs, and other cautions (it is referred to as “ work
instruction” in ISO/TS”).
3 Requirements
The supplier shall define requirements for work area, equipment, tools, etc. to maintain
manufacturing processes in a controlled state. Operation control documents such as
operation standard described in the following section shall be formulated and provided to
operators. All operation control documents shall be maintained in the same manner as
operation standard.
3.1 Preparation of Operation Standard
3.1.1 The supplier shall, in accordance with the following information, etc., define
procedures to be followed in the process and formulate operation standards.
1) Drawings (specifications, etc. included)
2) Process quality control table
3) Instruction manuals for facilities, measuring equipment, etc.
4) Past problem history
5) Handling instructions for materials, etc.
6) Instructions for safe work
3.1.2 The supplier shall include the following information in the operation standards.
1) Part name and process name
2) Component parts to use
3) Work sequence instruction
4) Control items, control methods, quality characteristics, criteria (limit sample,
master sample included)
5) Name of machine and/or tool used and direction for use.

1/3
July 1, 2014
6) All key points other than above (key points include possible failure modes, such
as potential nonconformity problems or effects on the product, which may occur
if the operation standards are not being followed).
7) Points relating to lot control, FIFO, etc.
8) Reaction plan for abnormal condition.
9) Directives for changeover of materials, lines or machines.
10) If applicable, check and maintenance of equipment.
3.1.3 The supplier shall formulate operation standards with consideration of the
following.
1) Describe reaction plans for abnormal condition with concrete case examples.
2) Describe quality characteristics and acceptance criteria quantitatively or
qualitatively (Quantitative description is advisable when possible. For
characteristics with qualitative criteria, it is important that a judge acquires a
normal condition of the quality characteristics and is able to identify the degree
of abnormally.).
3) Clarify inspection methods and operation key points.
4) Provide detailed and easy-to-understand instructions with illustrations and
photographs.
5) Describe control points clearly for past problem information.
6) Explain with easy to understand training material using plain language and
audiovisual aids.
7) Mark important quality characteristics with a symbol specified by Honda（○ Q ）or
supplier’s equivalent symbol.
8) Review validity of operation control documents during pre-production stages.
Modify complicated operations and revise confusing expressions throughout the
production preparation stage.
3.2 Issue of Operation Standards

3.2.1 The supplier shall, prior to issuing operation standards, verify legitimacy of
operations and validate operation standards with actual work.
3.2.2 The supplier shall finalize and issue operation standards before starting production
of parts. Operation standard shall be approved by appropriate personnel designated
by the supplier.
3.3 Revision Control for Operation Standards
The supplier shall, in the event of any changes made to the contents of operation
standards, control as follows.
3.3.1 When revising operation standards, record history and reasons of revisions, and
identify the current revision status.
3.3.2 Follow section 3.2 when revising operation standards.
3.3.3 Identify and distinguish operation standard that become obsolete due to the
revision or abolition in a manner that prevents unintended use. Obsolete duplicates
shall be handled in the same manner.
3.3.4 Ensure that relevant versions of applicable operation standards are available for
operators at point of use.
3.4 Use of Operation Control Documents and Training of Operators
3.4.1 The supplier shall use operation control documents and train operators of
respective processes to provide knowledge and skills, etc., necessary to perform
assigned tasks.
3.4.2 The supplier shall establish procedures and criteria to determine the necessary
competence for personnel performing work. Achieving competence of personnel
shall be evaluated and training records shall be maintained.
3.4.3 The supplier shall apply the preceding sections of 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 to all regular and
temporary employees.

2/3
July 1, 2014
4 Key points
1) Remnant auxiliary materials in production facilities shall be removed when verifying the
equipment set-up.

1 Operation standard
order.
2 Training record 15 years

3/3
3-8 Parts Delivery
July 1, 2014
3-8 Parts Delivery

1 Overview
1) Honda shall present suppliers with requirements for handling, transportation and storage,
etc., of parts when delivering from suppliers to Honda.
2) The supplier shall define basic requirements for handling, transportation and storage of
parts in accordance with the requirements set by Honda and preserve the conformity of
product.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall conform to the following requirements in order to prevent quality
degradation of parts until the time of delivery to Honda.
3.1.1 Handling of parts
3.1.1.1 The supplier shall use first in, first-out inventory control method for
transportation and storage of parts, and for the release and receipt of parts
between processes.
The supplier shall use the first-in-first-out inventory management system for
release and receipt of parts during internal processing, storage, and delivery.
3.1.1.2 The supplier shall, for fabrication and assembly of parts, take measures to
eliminate foreign particles, and to prevent shock, external damage, etc. to the
parts during transportation or from use of tools.
3.1.2 Storage of parts
3.1.2.1 The supplier shall, when storing work-in-process parts within the process,
employ identification method, such as part number, material mark, quantity,
commencement date of storage, etc., suitable for respective parts.
3.1.2.2 The supplier shall, when storing parts, determine locations suitable for
storage. Duration of storage, packaging or delivery packaging, and
geographical condition (ambient environment), etc. shall be taken into
consideration.
3.1.3 Identification of parts
3.1.3.1 The supplier shall, when delivering parts for new mode and/or trial event,
consult with Honda (new model preparation section) for identification method.
3.1.3.2 The supplier shall, for parts in the production stage, deliver to their
respective destinations in accordance with the instructions for delivery
packaging and the identification for delivery set forth in 【SQM 3-3 Delivery
Packaging 】and 【SQM 4-3 Identification and Traceability】.
3.1.3.3 Mixed loading, such as shipping multiple different parts in a single container
may be allowed after consultation with Honda (Material service). The supplier
shall clearly define the identification method for the mixed loaded parts to be
easily identifiable.
3.1.4 The supplier shall be informed of a specific time and location of delivery, if an order
of parts other than for mass production (diversion of trial parts, replacement parts for
unexpected shortage, parts for exceptional order, etc.) was placed.
3.1.5 Response to Receiving Inspection Result.
3.1.5.1 The supplier shall, if notified by Honda of delivery failure such as
misshipment, wrong shipment, etc., take action to respond to the matter.
3.1.5.2 The supplier shall, for delivery failure such as misshipment, wrong
shipment, etc., investigate the cause and implement measures to prevent
recurrence.
4 Key point
1) Apply special identification method after consultation with Honda, if delivering parts for
other than mass production (e.g. parts for the next model, production prototype parts,
etc.).

1/2
3-8 Parts Delivery
July 1, 2014
1) SQM 3-3 Delivery Packaging

2/2
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall present suppliers with evaluation items for verifying transition to mass
production. Honda may attend selected suppliers’ evaluation events.
2) The supplier shall verify completion of pre-production stage and issue a Mass Production
Transition Declaration, and enter into mass production stage.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A declaration by the quality assurance representative, facility
Mass Production quality representative, or deputy of a supplier stating that the
1
Transition Declaration requirements prescribed by Honda for quality and mass
productivity of parts have been satisfied.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall verify completion of pre-production stage by evaluating the following,
and confirm that manufacturing lines for mass production are in a controlled state.
3.1.1 Production
1) Permanent die, mold and injection mold.
2) Application of permanent facilities, jigs and tools, testing devices.
3) Production capacity (cycle time, nonadjusted ratio).
4) Logistics (packaging preparation, transportation testing)
5) Manpower arrangement
3.1.2 Quality
1) Reflection status of past problems (problems found in-house, upon delivery and
in the market).
2) Corrective actions taken against problems identified during preceding
evaluation events.
3) Conformance of quality characteristics specified on drawings or specifications.
(validity testing, dimensional accuracy, operational feeling, appearance, etc.).
4) Implementation of Process FMEA (condition value and set value, etc., set to the
process)
5) Precision of special checking fixture (including master and limit samples).
6) Process capability (Cpk) Note: for single specification limit case, Cp control shall apply.
7) Reliability of QA devices, error proofing.
8) Easiness of mounting to Honda products.
9) Process quality control table and operation control documents.
10) Employee training and education
11) Verified status of sub-suppliers’ production readiness.
3.2 The supplier shall confirm that items listed in section 3.1 are completed and compliant
with requirements, and issue Mass Production Transition Declaration prior to going into
mass production.
3.3 The supplier shall, if any problems are found during the process of issuing Mass
Production Transition Declaration, draw up a corrective action plan and implement
measures immediately.
Mass Production Transition Declaration shall be reissued upon completion of the
measures, as needed.
3.4 The supplier shall, if so requested by Honda, present or submit data and documents that
provide evidence of Mass Production Transition Declaration to Honda.

1/2
July 1, 2014
Data and documents that provide evidence of Mass
1 5 years
Production Transition Declaration

2/2
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall, considering the level of importance, novelty, etc., select critical control parts
for which suppliers are required to report results of validity testing.
2) The supplier shall draw up an implementation plan for validity testing to prove the
conformity of parts to applicable drawings (specifications included), etc., and complete all
testing prior to mass production startup.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
The supplier shall plan and implement validity testing in accordance with the following
requirement.
3.1 Preparation of Test Plan
1) Review requirements designated on drawings (specifications included).
2) Determine necessary tests to perform.
3) Draw up a test plan.
4) If so requested by Honda, submit the test plan to Honda.
Format of the test plan shall follow the “Validity Test Plans/Actual Results” set forth
in section 7. The supplier may choose to use its own form if Honda determines that
the conditions are met.
3.2 Monitoring of Test Plan
1) Monitor changes to drawings (specifications included) and review the test plan, if
necessary.
2) Monitor progress on validity testing against plan.
3) Complete tests and maintain results.
3.3 Approval of Test Result
1) Check test results and make judgments.
2) Take corrective actions where necessary.
3) The person in charge approves test results.
3.4 If requested by Honda, the supplier shall provide or submit plans of validity testing and
test results.
1 Validity test plans/actual results 5 years

1/5
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
Drawings, etc.
New Model
Verify contents
Preparation
Section
Submit
Draw up test plan Verify test plan
Production Preparation Stage
Need to Specification
Yes change the change
No
Test
Result
Not good
Good
Summarize test results
Approve test results Check test results

Submit New Model
Preparation
Section
Maintain records

2/5
July 1, 2014
7 Forms
7.1 Validity Testing Plan/Actual Performance Table (blank)
Prepared section ( supplier name ) Confirm section

Validity Test Plan/Actual
PerfomanceTable Rev no. Date Natuere of the change Supplier Honda
　Model code Honda event schedule

Plan Actual Plan Actual
　Part number
Confirmed Person Person
Approved by Prepared by Approved by Prepared by Confirmed by
by in charge in charge
　Part name
　Design change number
Part origin
Plan Actual
No Test item Scheduled Scheduled Date started Date completed
Test plan
Criteria Test condition n Test period Test result n Judgement
start date completion date (start) (actual)

3/5
July 1, 2014
7.2 Validity Testing Plan/Actual Performance Table (Entry procedure 1/2)
Prepared section ( supplier name ) Confirm section

Validity Test Plan/Actual 8
1 2 Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
PerfomanceTable Rev no. Date Natuere of the change Supplier Honda
　Model code 3 Honda event schedule

Plan Actual Plan Actual
Approved Prepared Approved Prepared Confirmed Person Confirmed Person
　Part number 4
by by by by by in charge by in charge
　Part name 5
9
　Design change number 6
Part origin 7
Plan Actual
No Test item Scheduled Scheduled Date started Date completed
Test plan
Criteria Test condition n Test period Test result n Judgement
start date completion date (start) (actual)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

4/5
July 1, 2014
7.3 Validity Testing Plan/Actual Performance Table (entry procedure 2)

No Item (section) Instruction
Enter company name and supplier code.
Supplier
1 Enter signature of the person in charge of and the person prepared
signature
the test plan and results. Enter the date of signature.
2 Honda signature For Honda use only (no entry required).
3 Model code Enter the code of a model in which the part is used.
4 Part number Enter Honda’s part number.
5 Part name Enter Honda’s part name.
Design change Enter Honda’s design change number used in the part subject to the
6
No. test.
7 Part origin Enter the origin of part subject to the test (trial or mass production).
8 Revision Enter revision history.
Honda event
9 Enter timing for production and other events of Honda.
schedule
10 Test item Enter the item subject to the test.
11 Criteria Enter criteria for the test.
12 Test condition Standards, measuring equipment, environments, etc., of the test.
13 n Enter the number of samples planned per test item.
14 Test period Enter the time period required for the test.
Scheduled start
15 Enter the scheduled date of the start of the test.
date
Scheduled
16 Enter the scheduled date of completion of the test.
Completion date
17 Date started Actual date of the test started.
18 Date completed Actual date of the test completed.
Enter the result of the test.
Enter the minimum and maximum values measured for quantitative
19 Test result tests.
For qualitative tests, enter results described in accordance with the
expressions used in the column of limit values of respective tests.
20 n Enter the number of samples used per test item.
21 Judgment Enter either accepted or rejected based on test results.
22 Test schedule Enter the anticipated schedule per test item.
Note Origin of items to
1 If necessary, test results lie between upper and lower limits.
be tested
Note1. This applies only to parts designated by Honda. The format in which results (data) are
presented is under the supplier’s control, however, it should be easily understandable.

5/5
February 1, 2013
1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide a verification method for process capability and mass productivity,
which Honda requires suppliers during early stage of mass production.
2) The supplier shall perform verifications of process capability and mass productivity in
accordance with requirements prescribed by Honda during the early stage of mass
production. The verification results shall be presented to Honda if so requested.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall perform the following during the early stage of mass production. Also, if
so requested by Honda, present or submit records of verification results.
3.1.1 Process Capability Verification
The supplier shall perform verification of process capability to confirm if quality
characteristics of parts are controllable by manufacturing conditions. For process
capability verification, the data with sample size of n=100 or more is desirable. A
minimum of 30 data sets should be used (not applicable for the parts for which
destructive testing is required or with quality characteristics assured by tooling) and
the process capability should be met at least one of the following requirements.
1) Cpk≧1.33 or P＜0.01 range is observed.
2) If 1.0≦Cpk＜1.33 or 0.01≦P≦0.3, 100 % inspection or sampling inspection is
incorporated in the process and the result shows no nonconformities In case of
any nonconformities detected, a procedure to take a retroactive action for the
product lot which may be affected is employed before dispatch of the lot .
Moreover, control process capability and seek improvement.
3) If Cpk＜1.0 or 0.3＜P, 100% inspection is conducted.
4) Investigate and determine whether or not insufficient process capability is due
to a shift of the median or dispersion, and take measures.
Note: for single specification limit case, Cp control shall apply.
3.1.2 Mass Production Verification

The supplier shall confirm production capacity by continuous production for two
hours or with a sample size of n=200 or more and verify feasibility of target yield,
cycle time, and maximum production capacity and operators’ proficiency level of
skills.
If continuous production for two hours or with a sample size of n= 200 or more is
not attainable, consult with Honda (new model preparation section).
3.2 The supplier shall, if above verification results do not satisfy the target, report to Honda
as needed and take measures immediately to achieve the target.
3.3 The supplier shall conduct process control or inspection as set forth in the following
examples for the period until the target value is reached.
1) Implementation of tightened inspection (increased frequency of sampling, add extra
inspection items, etc.)
2) Intensify manufacturing conditions that affect quality (tighten conditions, etc.).
3) Intensify monitoring of processes (increase frequency of process audit, etc.).
4) Temporal containment of specified nonconformity.

1/2
February 1, 2013
3.4 The supplier shall, based on information of delivery quality and market quality obtained
from Honda, improve quality of parts.
3.5 The supplier shall direct and control necessary sub-suppliers of component parts to
perform quality control of the same degree as set forth in this manual at the early stage of
mass production.
1 Process capability verification records 5 years
2 Mass production verification records 5 years

2/2
October 1, 2010
1 Overview
1) Honda shall present suppliers with requirements to continuously maintain and improve
the quality control system developed during pre-production stage, which includes change
point control in the mass production stage.
2) The supplier shall, for all changes to be made to operator, manufacturing process,
manufacturing method and/or parts, continuously maintain and improve the state of
manufacturing process control in accordance with the method employed for the
pre-production stage.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
An action designated to prevent recurrence of nonconformity,
1 Corrective action
once it has occurred.
3 Requirements
3.1 Work Standardization and Operator Training
3.1.1 Standardization of continuous work
The supplier shall, to maintain and improve quality of parts, continuously review work
procedures, key points, etc., and standardize them using process quality control
table and/or operation control documents (refer to【SQM 3-2-1 Process Quality
Control Table 】and【SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents】).
3.1.2 Education and Training
The supplier shall, for operators who are newly assigned to a process, provide
education and training to acquire knowledge, skills, etc., necessary to perform tasks
within the process. ( refer to【SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents】).
3.2 Process Control
3.2.1 Process FMEA
The supplier shall review and revise Process FMEA if any changes were made to the
process after completing the process FMEA ( refer to【SQM 5-5 Process FMEA】).
3.2.2 QA device (facilities, jigs and tools included)
The supplier shall regularly check the function of QA devices with respect to the
following matters. If test parts are used to check QA devices, validate the test parts
regularly.
1) Abnormality is detected as intended.
2) No false alarm goes off when normal.
3.2.3 Measuring Equipment
The supplier shall, in order to assure accuracy and precision of measuring
equipment, perform regular checks and calibrations, and record and maintain results.
( refer to 【SQM 3-6 Measuring Equipment Control】).
3.2.4 Production Equipment.
The supplier shall identify control items of production equipment that affect quality,
such as replacement criteria for expendable supplies. Procedures to manage the
control items shall be established.
3.2.5 Control of Consumables and Auxiliary Materials
The supplier shall identify control items of production equipment that affect quality,
such as replacement criteria for expendable supplies. Procedures to manage the
control items shall be established.

1/3
October 1, 2010
3.2.6 Control of Manufacturing Conditions

The supplier shall regularly confirm and record manufacturing conditions set in the
process which affects quality of parts (e.g. at the beginning, during, and the end of
work, or daily, weekly or monthly), and monitor the control state of the process with
results of the confirmation. If there is any abnormality found, follow corrective action
procedure specified by its own.
3.2.7 Process Trend Management
The supplier shall conduct a sampling inspection or 100 % inspection to assure the
quality of parts Record of the quantity of parts manufactured, nature of
nonconformity, and quantity of nonconforming parts shall be maintained and utilized
for the purposes in the following.
1) Understand dispersion, stability and process capability.
2) Implement measures against a process in which reduction in quality was found.
3) Prevent potential problems identified through an analysis of occurrence trend.
4) Forecast quality level for the next production and next model. Reflect findings in
process design, equipment design, etc.
The supplier shall control change points of process and parts to ensure traceability of
parts (refer to 【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】) .
3.4 Identification and Traceability
The supplier shall identify parts by suitable means and record manufacturing history to
ensure traceability of parts (refer to【SQM 4-3 Identification and Traceability】).
3.5 Inspection and Testing of Parts
3.5.1 The supplier shall perform inspection and testing at a frequency that allows the
detection of problems with parts prior to delivery to Honda.
3.5.2 The supplier shall, if there are any changes were made to the inspection and
testing method or frequency, etc., necessary for each part, reflect such changes in
the Process Quality Control Table and operating standard documents immediately.
The supplier shall, if there are any changes made to the method, frequency, etc.,
reflect such changes immediately in the process quality control table and operation
control documents of each part.
3.5.3 The supplier shall control records of inspection or testing results in a manner that
allows the supplier to present or submit upon request by Honda.
3.5.4 The supplier shall periodically verify the effectiveness of limit samples and master
samples in order for the inspection and testing to be performed correctly.
( refer to【SQM 3-5-1 Parts Inspection Criteria】and【SQM 3-5-2 Preparation of Limit
Samples】)
3.6 Control of Nonconforming Parts
The supplier shall define and document procedures for handling of nonconforming parts.
Procedures including identification of nonconforming or suspect parts, quarantine of
nonconforming parts, criteria for disposal of nonconforming parts, etc., shall be
established with defined roles and responsibilities (refer to【SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality
Problem】).
3.7 Corrective Action
The supplier shall define and document procedures for corrective action to take against
quality nonconformity occurred in-house, in Honda or in the market (refer to 【SQM 4-5
Corrective Action Report】,【SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem】and 【SQM 4-5-2
Market Quality Problem】).

2/3
October 1, 2010
Monitoring data of manufacturing conditions of production
1 3 years
facilities which affect quality.
2 Training record 15 years
2) SQM 3-5-1 Inspection Criteria for Parts
3) SQM 3-5-2 Preparation for Limit Samples
4) SQM 3-6 Control of Monitoring and Measuring Devices
5) SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents
10) SQM 4-5-2 Market Quality Problem

3/3
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide requirements for identification and traceability control, which is to
verify necessary information immediately, determine the cause and scope of parts
affected, and take prompt countermeasures in the event that nonconformity occurs at a
supplier’s production stage or after shipment.
2) The supplier shall identify parts in accordance with requirements prescribed by Honda,
and control traceability.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
The ability to trace the history, application or location of a
1 Traceability
product or servicing by record identification.
A group of parts which are delivered to Honda or a location
2 Delivery lot specified by Honda in a batch, corresponding to the”delivery
slip”.
A group of parts manufactured or deemed manufactured
3 Manufacturing lot
under the same condition.
A record of production corresponding to the identification of a
Manufacturing
4 manufacturing lot, which includes the date and amount of
history
manufacture, and results of inspection.
Control method that forms a manufacturing lot and
Manufacturing lot
5 subsequently control traceability of parts by identifying such
control
lot and its manufacturing history.
Manufacturing process for which manufacturing lot shall be
Manufacturing lot formed and identified in order to track and control traceability
6
forming process of parts, which is determined by quality characteristic priority,
process layout, equipment, process capability, etc.
In the case where there are two or more manufacturing lot
7 Key process forming processes, a representative process for lot retrieval in
those manufacturing lot forming processes.
Parts returned from Honda by the unit of delivery lot due to
8 Lot-out parts
nonconformity, such as not satisfying specifications.
3 Requirements
3.3 Identification
The supplier shall identify parts and their component parts by suitable means throughout
all production processes, i.e. from receiving of materials to delivery of finished goods to
Honda (all delivery destinations designated by Honda included).
If Honda requires use of barcode labels, attach barcode of specified standard.
3.1.1 Identification of Parts
The supplier shall follow the directions from Honda in regard to identification. If no
direction is given, consult with Honda.
If parts are designated by Honda as lot-control-specified parts, identification of
manufacturing lot number, etc. of the parts shall be determined after consultation
with Honda regarding location and method, etc. for identification display.
3.1.2 Identification of Delivery Lot
Submit designated “Delivery Slip” to Honda for each delivery lot.

1/10
July 1, 2014
3.1.3 Identification of Delivery Container

Each delivery container shall be identified by parts specification card, etc.
Information below shall be contained in the identification.
1) Company name
2) Honda part number
3) Honda part name
4) Delivery date specified by Honda
5) Quantity
6) Number of containers
7) Others (to be decided after consultation with Honda where necessary)
3.3 Traceability Control
The supplier shall control records of manufacturing history and parts release so that the
parts are traceable to the delivery lot. Ensure traceability in a manner that manufacturing
history is traceable throughout all stages from component parts to finished goods.
3.2.1 Manufacturing Control
The manufacturing history shall include the following information.
1) Date of manufacture and quantity of parts manufactured
2) Manufacturing condition of the lot and quality characteristics confirmation based
on the process quality control table at the time of manufacturing.
3) Process changes other than those mentioned in 2) which may affect quality, and
results of the action taken and confirmation ( Refer to【SQM 4-4 Change Point
Control】).
3.2.2 First-in, First-out
All parts which contain component parts and work-in-process parts shall be
controlled on a first-in, first-out basis. This also applies to items which generally do
not circulate, such as inventory in the warehouse, emergency stock, repair parts, etc.
All parts including component parts and work-in-process parts shall be controlled
based on a first-in, first-out basis hereinafter referred to as “FIFO”). Items out of
regular circulation, such as warehousing parts, emergency stock, repair parts, etc.
shall be handled in the same manner.
3.2.3 Handling of in-process nonconforming parts (off-line repair/rework).
Maintain traceability of parts quarantined and awaiting further treatment.
3.2.4 Handling of Lot-Out Parts
When disposing lot-out parts, record the reason, date, and quantity, etc. of parts
being disposed in the manufacturing history.
In principal, due to its critical nature, lot-out parts shall not be repaired or modified.
Those which are determined that repair, sorting, concession, etc., (herein after
referred to as “repairs, etc.“) can be made shall be handled in accordance with
【SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem】
3.2.5 Traceability Control for Purchased Parts
To ensure traceability, the supplier shall assure that sub-suppliers employ the same
degree of control for manufacturing history.
( refer to 【SQM 2-4 Sub-Supplier Quality Assurance】)

2/10
July 1, 2014
3.3 Manufacturing Lot Control

The supplier shall, if parts are designated by Honda as lot-control-specified parts,
determine the matters set forth in section 3.3.3.1 in consultation with Honda’, formulate a
manufacturing lot on a FIFO basis, and control manufacturing history.
3.3.1 Lot-Control-Specified Parts
If the following conditions apply, the supplier shall control parts as
lot-control-specified parts.
1) Important safety parts designated as HS, HA or HB on product drawing
(including processing charts, etc.) (Refer to【SQM 2-1 Important Safety Parts).
2) Parts other than important safety parts specified by Honda with
“Lot-Control-Specified Parts Notice” set forth in section 7.1.
3.3.2 Formation of Manufacturing Lot
Manufacturing lot shall be formed in the range of parts that are or are deemed
manufactured under the same conditions in accordance with the classification shown
below. Manufacturing lot size shall not exceed the volume of production per day.
No. Classification Criteria for Manufacturing Lot Formation
Form a manufacturing lot for each material charge No. or
1 Material
batch.
Form a manufacturing lot when tooling in a process (including
2 Mean
inspection process) is set up.
Form a manufacturing lot for each manufacturing assignment
3 Equipment which is made to two or more machines, equipment, molds,
production lines, etc.
4 Work shift Form a lot for each production date or work shift.
3.3.3 Control of Manufacturing Lot
3.3.3.1 The supplier shall determine the following matters in consultation with
Honda.
1) Manufacturing lot forming unit, manufacturing lot forming process and key
process.
2) FIFO control method
3) Display method of manufacturing lot identification (manufacturing lot
number structure, identification display method on each delivery container,
display languages, barcode labels, etc.).
3.3.3.2 The supplier shall establish a system for recording manufacturing lot, which
enables manufacturing lot and delivery lot to be retrieved from the
manufacturing history of parts.
The method of manufacturing lot control, manufacturing lot number display, etc.
shall be defined in “Lot control (Lot Number Display Details)” in accordance with
section 7.2, and confirmed by Honda upon Honda’s request prior to starting
mass production.
The designated format of “Lot Control (Lot Number Display Details)” is
recommended for use. However, in case that Honda confirms that the format
submitted by the supplier is equivalent to “Lot Control (Lot No. Display Details)”
format, it may be substituted for Lot control (Lot No. Display Details)”.
3.3.3.3 If any changes to the process that may affect quality are found in a lot other
than the manufacturing lot forming unit set forth in section 3.3.2 above, record
such changes as a manufacturing history and separate the lot.
3.3.3.4 If a need arises to change matters prescribed in section 3.3.3.1 at the
production stage or to add lot-control-specified parts, it shall be determined after
consultation with Honda (receiving quality section) and take appropriate actions.

3/10
July 1, 2014
15 years after the issue of
1 Lot-Control-Specified Parts Notice
discontinuation order.
15 years after the issue of
2 Lot Number Display Details, or equivalent
discontinuation order.
3 Record of manufacturing history of parts 15 years

4/10
July 1, 2014
6 Flowchart
Identification and Traceability
Supplier Honda
Contact
Specify Important Safety Parts New Model

Preparation
Section
Drawing
P re -P ro d u c tio n S ta g e
Select lot-control-specified New Model

parts Preparation
Section
Lot-Control-
Decision of lot control standard items Specified Parts
1) Lot forming unit Notice
2) Lot forming process and key
process
3) FIFO control.
4) Lot number display method.
5) Recording of lot control.
New Model
Preparation
Lot Number Display Section
Details Verify display contents
or
Receiving
History
Record of Section
Manufacture parts manufacturing
M a s s P ro d u c ito n S ta g e
Carry out lot control history
Manufacturing/
Carry-in
Assembly
Record of
manufacturing
history
Legend: 　　　　　　　For cases when Honda assign lot control parts in addition to the important safety parts as so designated in drawings.

5/10
July 1, 2014
7 Forms
7.1 Lot-Control-Specified parts notice (blank)
Lot control [specfied parts] Honda Motor Co., Ltd. (Name of facility)
Issue Date: / / (YY/MM/DD)

Contact Section Issue Section
To:
Lot-Control-Specfied Parts Notice
The following parts have been decided as lot-control-specified parts in addition to important safety
parts (HS, HA and HB of important safety part rank) indicated in the title field of the drawing.
Critical
No. Model Part Number Part Name
Process
(Note) 1. Upon receiving this notice,clarify the lot control method for parts subject to lot control in
[Lot Number Display Details] or the like.
2. Maintain [Lot Number Display Details] in a manner that it can be submitted if so requested.
3. When display a lot mark on each part(if there is no specification on the drawing),consult
with for display method.
4. Parts are should be controlled on a "first-in first-out"basis.
05101

6/10
July 1, 2014
7.2 Lot Number Display Details (blank)
ロット管理
〔ロット表示明細〕
LOT № DISPLAY DETAILS
部番製造部門名
PART № SUPPLIER NAME
部品名
PART NAME
当用紙に記入できない場合（スペース的に）は別紙を添付しても可。IF SPACE ON THIS FROM IS INSUFFICIENT FOR ENTERING ILLUSTRATIONS, ATTACH ADDITIONAL FORM.
ロット形成工程を記載して代表工程を ○で囲む。 ENTER LOT FORMING PROCESSES AND CIRCLE KEY PROCESS
ロット形成工程
LOT FORMING PROCESS
ロット番号構成
SELECT PROCESS
代 STRUCTURE OF LOT №
表表示場所
工 LOCATION OF LOT NO. IDENTIFICATION
程
表示方法
LOT NO. IDENTIFICATION METHOD
略図 ILLUSTRATION OF PARTS LOT CONTROL
製造部門本田技研工業株式会社
SUPPLIER HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD
担当者責任者発行日担当者確認者責任者発行日
PERSON RESPONSIBLE
PERSON IN CHARGE APPROVED BY DATE OF ISSUE PERSON IN CHARGE FOR CONFIRMATION APPROVED BY DATE OF ISSUE
05101

7/10
July 1, 2014
7.3 1/2 Lot Number Display Details (entry procedure) 1/2
様式－２ロット管理
PART №
1 SUPPLIER NAME
3
部品名 2
PART NAME
ロット形成工程を記載して代表工程を○で囲む。 ENTER LOT FORMING PROCESSES AND CIRCLE KEY PROCESS
ロット形成工程
当用紙に記入できない場合（スペース的に）は別紙を添付しても可。IF SPACE ON THIS FROM IS INSUFFICIENT FOR ENTERING ILLUSTRATIONS, ATTACH ADD
4
LOT FORMING PROCESS
ロット番号構成 5
SELECT PROCESS
代 STRUCTURE OF LOT №
表表示場所 6
程表示方法 7
PERSON RESPONSIBLE
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
05101

8/10
July 1, 2014
Lot Number Display Details (entry procedure) 2/2
No. Entry instructions Section
① - Enter part number of a part that corresponds to this [LOT No. DISPLAY DETAILS]. Supplier
② - Enter part name that corresponds to the part number.
③
- Enter company name.
④ - List lot forming processes in process order, and circle key processes for lot control. If
creating in line with a notification regarding lot control specification of parts, include in
the lot forming processes the critical process written on the notification.
(Example) casting, gear cutting, induction hardening, delivery
⑤ - Enter the structure of lot control number. (Example) 5 K 25

2005 July 25th
⑥ - Enter the location on the product where lot control number is to be shown.
⑦ - Enter identification method of lot control number. (Example) Stamping, applying labels,
⑧ - Describe lot control method for each process to be lot-controlled.

(Example)
<Casting> ： Number of casting per day for each die number
(1) Lot structure
(2) Lot number ： 5K06 2 (July 6, 2005. Die number 2)
(3) Lot control record： ① Release date (MM/DD) / Number released
<Gear (1) Lot structure ： Number processed per day for each gear cutting
cutting> (2) Lot number ： 5K08 5 (July 8, 2005. No. 5 machine)
(3) Lot control record： ① Casting lot No. ② Gear cutting lot No.
③ Release date (MM/DD) / Number released
<Delivery> (1) Lot structure ： Number delivered per day

(2) Lot number ： 5K10 (July 10, 2005)
(3) Lot control record ： ① Casting lot No.
② Induction hardening lot No.
③ Delivery date (MM/DD) (Honda-designated
(4) Lot number
structure standard delivery date, time) / Number of goods delivered
Year The last number of the year

Month Jan Feb March April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
A B C D E H K M R S T V
Day Use the date as it is
Supplier’s PIC and Quality Assurance Representative to sign or affix his or her seal.
⑨
⑩ - The Facility Quality Representative can act as a deputy to the Facility Assurance Supplier
Representative.
⑪ Enter the date of issue starting from the last two digits of the year. (YY/MM/DD) Supplier
⑫
⑬
⑭
For Honda use only (no entry required). Honda
⑮

9/10
July 1, 2014
Lot Number Display Details (entry example)
ロット管理
９００１８－Ｓ００－００００
PART № SUPPLIER NAME
部品名
ＢＯＬＴ,　ＦＬＧ ○○○○(株)
PART NAME
ロット形成工程ロット形成工程を記載して代表工程を○で囲む。 ENTER LOT FORMING PROCESSES AND CIRCLE KEY PROCESS
当用紙に記入できない場合（スペース的に）は別紙を添付しても可。IF SPACE ON THIS FROM IS INSUFFICIENT FOR ENTERING ILLUSTRATIONS, ATTACH ADDITIO
LOT FORMING PROCESS Material －Cold Working－Heart Treatment－Galvanizing－Release/Inspection

ロット番号構成０７０４０４
SELECT PROCESS
代 STRUCTURE OF LOT № 年　月　　日

表表示場所
On the side of the container.
程表示方法
Labeling
●材料
●　Material①ロットの構成：コイル材ごとの番号付け
① Lot structure
②ロット番号 : numbering
： per coil.
０７０４０２Ａ（意味：０７年４月２日、鋼種Ａ）
Foop
② Lot number : 070402A ：( reads
③ロットの管理記録 April 2, '07, steel type: A)
素材記録、材料ロットを関連つけて記入する。
③ Lot control record: record material records in conjunction
with the material lot number. Lot No.
070402A
●　Cold
●冷間加工 working
①ロットの構成：材料ロットごとの１日加工数 No. of part processded a day
( boxed)
① Lot structure
②ロット番号 : total no. of
： parts processed per day.
０７０４０３（意味：２００７年４月３日）
② Lot number : 070403A ：( reads
③ロットの管理記録 April 3, 2007)
材料ロットNo、冷間加工数を関連つけて記入する。
③ Lot control record: record material lot number in conjunction with total Lot No.
number of cold-working processes. 070403
No. of heat treated parts a day

●熱処理 treatment
●　Heat ①ロットの構成：冷間加工ロットごとの１日熱処理数
(boxed)
① Lot structure
②ロット番号
: total no. ：of parts processed per cold working lot.
０７０４０４（意味：２００７年４月４日）
② Lot number : 070404A ( reads April 4, 2007)
③ロットの管理記録：冷間加工ロット、熱処理ロット／熱処理数を連係つける。
③ Lot control record: record in conjunction with cold-working lot, heat
Lot. No. Lot.No
treatment lot and total of heat treated parts. 070404 070404
●　Plating
●メッキ ①ロットの構成：熱処理ロットごとの１日メッキ数
① Lot structure
②ロット番号 : total no. of
： parts plated per heat treatment lot.
０７/０４/０５（意味：２００７年４月５日）
② Lot number : 07/04/05 ( ：reads
③ロットの管理記録 April 5, 2007)
熱処理ロット、メッキロット／メッキ数を連係つける
③ Lot control record: record in conjunction with heat treatment lot, plating lot
Lor No.
and total of plated parts. 07/04/05
●　Plating
●検査/出荷 ①ロットの構成：メッキロットごとの検査数
① Lot structure
②ロット番号
: inspection： lot０７/０４/０５（意味：２００７年４月５日）
per plating lot.
② Lot number : 07/04/05 (reads April 5, 2007)
③ロットの管理記録：メッキロット、検査/出荷ロット／検査数/出荷を連係つけるロット番号ロット番号
③ Lot control record: record in conjunction with plating lot, inspection lot, 07/04/05 07/04/05
release lot, no. of inspected parts and no. of released parts. Lot. No Lot No.
07/04/05 07/04/05
PERSON RESPONSIBLE
Responsible
D PIC '07/04/25
Person
Responsible
QC PIC '07/04/25
Person for
05101

10/10
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide requirements to control all change points with respect to labor,
manufacturing process, manufacturing method, and parts during a supplier’s production
process.
2) The supplier shall maintain traceability of all change points in accordance with
requirements prescribed by Honda.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Occasions where changes in part specifications, scheduled or
sudden manufacturing plan changes, and equipment changes, etc.,
occur.
Furthermore, sudden changes include the following examples:
1 Change point 1) Suspending and restarting the production line
2) Process changes such as equipment abnormalities
3) Sudden changes in operator
4) Follow-up of an operation delay
Parts of the initial lot released from an originating section to its next
Initial
section or of the initial lot released from a supplier to Honda, to which
2 production parts
the supplier applied changes in specification, manufacturing method,
(IPP)
etc. This applies to parts ordered for mass production use only.
The IPP to which specification change was implemented by supplier
Specification
3 in accordance with the “Application Change Instruction” issued by
change IPP
Honda.
The IPP for which quality improvement was implemented by supplier
Quality
in accordance with the “Rejection Countermeasure Request,”
4 improvement
“Market Quality Information [Analysis/Countermeasure Request],” ,
IPP
“Honda Trouble Report” or other forms issued by Honda.
The IPP falling under the items other than specification change IPP
Self-controlled or quality improvement IPP, which is self-controlled by supplier
5
IPP through confirming and recording quality, process-ability,
assemble-ability, etc. after changes.
Presentation to Honda of specification change IPP before mass
Prior
6 production start (before implementing the change) to confirm
confirmation
compliance with specification change.
Presentation to Honda of self-controlled IPP, etc. before mass
IPP
7 production start to confirm quality compliance, process-ability,
presentation
assemble-ability, etc.
Delivery A destination of delivery specified on the delivery slip.
8
location

1/15
July 1, 2014
3 Requirements
The supplier determines the control procedure regarding change point control and
records the requirements.
The following items are to be included in the control point record:
1) Change point content
include at least ‘‘Examples of IPPs in section 7’’
2) The date the change point occurred or was discovered
3) The production day or release day
4) In applicable cases, inspection results, etc.
3.2 IPP Classification
The supplier shall classify information regarding change points into specification changes,
quality improvement, and self-control according to the established procedures for each
respective category listed below (refer to ‘‘Section 7 Examples of IPPs and Change Point
Control’’ for categories).
3.2.1 Specification Change IPP
3.2.1.1 The supplier shall, based on the Application Change Instruction from Honda,
confirm the items requiring prior confirmation and the items requiring immediate
application to mass production.
3.2.1.2 The supplier shall perform fabrication, assembly and inspection of IPP to
which a specification change is applied, and shall take appropriate measures if
any problem is found.
3.2.2 Quality Improvement IPP
3.2.2.1 The supplier shall perform fabrication, assembly and inspection of IPP for
which quality improvement is implemented in accordance with a quality
improvement request from Honda, and take appropriate measures if any
problem is found.
3.2.2.2 The supplier shall submit IPP, inspection data and etc. described in above
section 3.2.2.1 to a quality improvement instructing section of Honda and obtain
confirmation. The supplier shall consult with Honda about how to proceed with
the quality improvement IPP, etc. if necessary.
3.2.3 Self-controlled IPP
3.2.3.1 The supplier clarifies what they will report to Honda in advance within
self-controlled IPP. Furthermore, the report is of the following items:
・Changes to the written content of the “Process Quality Control Table”
・Anything applicable to “Section 7 Examples of IPPs”
・Anything deemed necessary by the quality assurance representative or the
facility quality representative.
3.2.3.2 The supplier shall, when reporting to Honda, fill out the slip from form 9.1
‘‘Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form.’’ The submission phase for planned
change points is three months prior to a supplier‘s production starting, and when
a sudden change point occurs. Furthermore, in urgent cases, Honda should be
contacted first and their instructions followed.
3.2.3.3 Upon obtaining the approval of the quality assurance representative or
facility quality representative, the supplier submits the ‘‘Self-Controlled IPP
Communication Form ’’ to Honda.
3.2.3.4 The supplier shall review the “Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form”
returned by Honda for indicated items (IPP items, number of inspection samples,
time of submission, etc.), and proceed with the work outlined in the form.
3.2.3.5 The supplier shall perform fabrication, assembly, and inspection of
self-controlled IPP, and if a problem is found, take appropriate measures.
The supplier shall perform fabrication, assembly, and inspection of
self-controlled IPP, and shall take appropriate measures if any problem is found.

2/15
July 1, 2014
3.3 Judgment for Mass Production

3.3.1 The supplier shall obtain approval for mass production from Honda with respect to
change points for IPP specification changes.
Inspection samples of IPP, inspection data and IPP tags (refer to “IPP Control [IPP]”
in section 9.5) shall be submitted to Honda for approval by the specified date.
3.3.2 The Quality Assurance Representative or Facility Quality Representative of the
supplier shall determine applicability to mass production based on processing,
assembly, and inspection results, excluding change points in 3.3.1. Furthermore,
self-controlled IPP notified to Honda will be based on set requirements from the
“self-controlled IPP communication form” and shall determine applicability to mass
production.
3.3.3 In the ‘‘self-controlled IPP communication report,’’ the supplier submits the results
from determining applicability of self-controlled IPP to mass production to Honda.
3.4 Mass Production and Release
3.4.1 The supplier shall start mass production of IPP which has been approved for mass
production while controlling and following supplier procedures.
3.4.2 The supplier shall comply with the FIFO order and release IPP accordingly.
3.4.3 The supplier shall issue and attach an IPP tag to the specification IPP and the
quality improvement IPP and submit inspection data to Honda. The supplier shall, if
required by Honda, also issue and attach IPP tag to the applicable self-controlled
IPP and submit inspection data to Honda.
3.4.4 If there are more than one delivery locations, IPP tag shall be attached to each
initial lot released for each of the locations. In the case where an IPP lot is divided
and delivered in multiple containers, attach a supplemental IPP tag to each container
(refer to section 9.7). Handling of supplemental IPP tags may be consulted with
Honda (material service section) in advance.
3.4.5 If the same IPP is used for multiple parts, i.e. assembled into parts of multiple types
or variations, the supplier may consult with Honda (receiving quality section) for use
of IPP tags.
3.5 Process Control
3.5.1 The supplier shall monitor the process of IPP after transition to mass production for
a period of one month, as a rule, focusing on the conformity of quality. Length of the
monitoring period may be adjusted at the discretion of the quality assurance
representative or facility quality representative of the supplier.
3.1.1 The supplier shall, in the case where there are any specified items from Honda on
the control after application to mass production, implement such items.
3.6 Sub-Supplier Control
The supplier shall direct and control its sub-suppliers and ensure IPP control of the same
level as this manual requires for the component parts processed by sub-suppliers.
3.7 Controlling IPP of Supply Parts
3.7.1 The supply parts supplier shall provide supplier parts users of information about
IPP prior to transition to mass production.
3.7.2 The supplier shall, if receiving supply parts with IPP tag attached, ensure
traceability of the IPP and re-attach IPP tag to the initial lot released to Honda
containing the IPP of supply parts.
3.7.3 The supplier shall, when dividing the IPP lot of supply parts to use for multiple
types or variations of parts, issue and attach a new IPP tag for each initial lot
released to Honda containing the supply parts IPP.

3/15
July 1, 2014
4 Key point
1) Confirm quality of parts before and after the change, if an unexpected change occurs.
2) In the process of communicating specification change IPP, do not omit or abbreviate
digits of part number in order to prevent miscommunication.
3) When adopting a new material for coated parts, verify its durability, adhesion, etc. by
coating tests.
4) In the event of transferring production, provide the party to which the production is
transferred with necessary information to carry on the same quality control items
specified in standards.
Self-Controlled IPP Communication
1 One year
Form
2 Record of change points 15 years
3 IPP control 〔IPP〕 15 years
4 Inspection data attached to IPP 15 years

4/15
July 1, 2014
7 Examples of IPP
No Classification Item Description
1 Specification specification ・Change to new specification.
change IPP change ・Non-interchangeable specification change is made
・Interchangeable specification change is made.
2 Quality Quality ・Quality improvement is made on the request of the
improvement improvement receiving quality section or market quality section
IPP
3 Self-controlled New supplier ・ Addition of a new supplier (including supplier’s
IPP plant expansion).
・ Supplier change (including supplier manufacturing
facilities).
・Change of destination of delivery.
・Change in manufacturing process from in-house to
outsourced, or vise versa.
Material ・Material supplier change
change ・Change of material such as HM-supplied material to
self-procured material is made and vice versa.
・ Change of material not related to a specification
change (including rust preventive oil, lubricant , etc.).
Change in ・Change in method of casting or forging.
process ・Change in sintering conditions (process, temperature,
conditions or time, etc.).
methods ・Change in heat treatment conditions (temperature,
time, heating method, cooling method, etc.)
・Change in molding conditions for rubber and synthetic
resin.
・Change in welding conditions.
・Change in cutting conditions.
・Change in machining datum or setting method.
・Change in plating, buffing or coating conditions.
・Change assembly conditions.
Process ・Consolidate, abolish or change in process sequence.
sequence ・Change in process from temporary to permanent, or
change vice versa.
Machining ・Modify or repair of the machine.
process ・A new machine is used.
change ・Machine is relocated.
Jig and tool ・Change in master sample for parts fabrication.
change ・New or modified jigs and tools.
Die/mold ・Modification or renewal of dies/molds.
change
Inspection ・ New or modified checking fixture or inspection
method equipment.
Change ・Change in measuring instruments or measuring criteria.
（＊）・When a change in operator of critical process, which
Operator is particularly designated as a process requiring IPP
change (*) control whenever operator change is made, occurs.
Change in ・ Change in delivery and packaging methods and
delivery containers.
method or
delivery
packaging
Operator change: Items require IPP control. Advance notice to Honda may not be required.

5/15
July 1, 2014
8 Flowchart
8.1 Specification change IPP
Supplier Honda
Contact
Specification change notice.

( notify whether or not a Prior
Confirmation is required) Procurement
Keep track of changes to the Application Section
specification Change
Instruction
Correction
IPP fabrication, assembly and Prior confirmation is required

inspection
Issue IPP tag
Prior Confirmation
not required Create Inspection
Check Sheet
Specification Change IPP
NG Receiving
Transition Quality
to MP
Judge Section
NG
transition to
MP OK
IPP tag
judged OK
OK Verify IPP ③
MP
Issue IPP
tag
Receiving
Release Inspection
Issue IPP tag
Store IPP tag (①)
Retun
Create Inspection IPP ③ tag
Check Sheet
IPP ③ tag
Receiving
Control IPP ③ tag Quality
Attach IPP tag
to the product Section
IPP tag (①) is disposed after receiving (③)

6/15
July 1, 2014
8.2 Quality improvement IPP
Supplier Honda
Contact
Quality
Quality problem occurred Improvement
Indication
Quality Section
Analysis and C/M for improvement
problem request Receiving
Quality
Correction Section
Market
IPP fabrication, Quality
assembly and inspection Section
Confirm reply
and contents
of C/M NG
Quality
Improvement
Q uality Im provem ent IPP
Indication
OK Section
Transition to NG
MP
OK
Receiving
quality
Mass Production section
or
Market
Receiving Quality
Release inspection Section of
delivery
Issue IPP tag destination
Store IPP tag (①)
Create Inspection Attach IPP tag
Check Sheet to the product
Retun
IPP ③ tag
Control IPP ③ tag IPP ③ tag
IPP tag (①) is disposed after receiving (③)

Quality improvement instructing section means either RQ Sec or MQ Sec.

7/15
July 1, 2014
8.3 Self-Controlled IPP
Supplier Honda
Contact
Keep track of changes
Determine necessary
information
Quality Assurance
Representative Approval
Self-controlled IPP
Communication Form Receiving
NG
verify and reply Quality
Section
OK
Receive reply,
review
Correction
IPP fabrication, assembly, and inspection

IPP Presentation IPP Presentation
not requried Required
IPP
Issue IPP
tag Receiving
Create
inspection Quality
Actual machine
Self-controlled IPP
Section
verification inspection
Verify IPP tag（③）
IPP tag judged OK
③
Quality Assurance NG
Representative
OK
Self-controlled IPP Create
Communication Form inspection Verify
Mass production
IPP Presentation IPP Presentation Required
not required
Receiving Receiving
Release Quality
Inspection
Issue IPP Section
Release tag Create
(control change Inspection
records)
※Store IPP tag（①）
Attach IPP tag to

the product
Receiving
Return IPP
Control IPP tag（③） IPP tag Quality
tag（③）
③ Section
※IPP tag（①） is disposed of after receiving（③）

8/15
July 1, 2014
9 Forms
9.1 Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form
Issued on　　　YYYY/MM/DD
To:
Company/Section Name
Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form
QA Rep Confirmation PIC
Part No Planned
Part Name Sudden
Affect Quality Characteristics

Part Characteris tic Yes/No Change Items Change Details Reason for Change
Yes/No Affected
Transport, delivery packaging change

Process condition/ method change
Important Quality
Inspection MethodChange
Process Series Change
Characteristics
Machine change
Material Change
Jig, tool change
Tooling Change
Newsupplier
Part Inspection
Others
Criteria
Part Approval
Chemical
Substance
Others
Scheduled Date
CompletedDate
Schedule Scheduled Honda Response Supplier Evaluation Results
Assessment Items Evaluation Details Production Delivery
Date Date
Process Function
m as s production im portant
m onitoring item s
Validation Test after trans ition to m as s YYYY/MM/DD
production
（general rule 1 m onth ） QA Rep Confirmation Submitter
Process FMEA
（ Prevention）
（ Outflow Prevention）
（ Past Trouble Verification）
Control No. Honda　Confirmation

IPP Measurement
Section Name Section Name
・Proces s Quality Control Table

Operation Control Standards
Revis ion/Es tablis hm ent YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD
・Operator Training Practice
Confirmation Submitter Receipt Confirmation Submitter
Others
14032 Original to be retained until：　 (YYYY/MM)

9/15
July 1, 2014
9.2 Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form (Entry Procedure)
３１ Issued on　　　YYYY/MM/DD
To:
２ Company/Section Name
Part No Planned
６５４
Part Name Sudden
Yes/No Affected

Important Quality
Inspection Method Change

Characteristics
Material Change
Machine change
Jig, tool change
Tooling Change
Newsupplier
Part Inspection
Others
Criteria
Part Approval ７８１０１１１２
Chemical
Substance
Others ９
Scheduled Date
CompletedDate
Date Date
２０
Process Function １５１６
m as s production im portant ２１
m onitoring item s
Validation Test after trans ition to m as s YYYY/MM/DD
production
（general rule 1 m onth ）１８ QA Rep Confirmation Submitter
Process FMEA
（ Prevention）
（ Outflow Prevention）
２２
（ Past Trouble Verification）
１３
IPP Measurement １４１９
１７ Section Name Section Name
・Proces s Quality Control Table

Operation Control Standards ２３
Revis ion/Es tablis hm ent YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD
・Operator Training Practice
Confirmation Submitter Receipt Confirmation Submitter
Others

10/15
July 1, 2014
9.3 Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form (Entry Procedure)
NO. Item Entry method Entered by
1 Issuance Enter date of issue.
2 Company/ Section Name Enter company name and section name.

Enter the receiving quality section and applicable Honda factory for
3 To:
parts delivery.
Submitter/Confirmation/Quality The submitter, confirmer, quality assurance representative or
4
Assurance Representative facility quality representative add their signature or seal.
For change details, in the case of planned change points, put [○]
5 Planned/ Sudden in the ''plan'' column, and in the case of sudden change points, put
[○] in the ''sudden'' column.
Enter in ''change items'' the applicable part number/part name in
change items. In addition, if there are multiple parts, enter the part
6 Part Number/ Part Name number/part name of a representative part, and attach on a
separate paper the part numbers/part names of all parts received at
the applicable facility.
Regarding each part characteristic of changed parts, in applicable
7 Yes/No
cases mark ''Y,'' and in unapplicable cases mark ''N.''
Regarding each part characteristic of changed parts, in affected
8 Affect Yes/No
cases mark ''Y,'' and in unaffected cases mark ''N.''
Enter ''○'' for appliable change items. In addition, if the change Supplier
9 Change Item items are not applicable, enter ''○'' in other, and in the change
content column enter those details.
10 Change Details Insert concrete details regarding change items.
11 Reason for Change Enter the reasons for changes regarding the change details.
Enter the quality characteristics that will be affected by the change
12 Quality Characteristics Affected
items/change details.
Enter determined evaluation items/evaluation content regarding
quality characteristics affected by change items/change details.
13 Evaluation Details
Furthermore, the supplier may attach a separate sheet if
information will not fit on the form.
14 Schedule Date Enter the schedule date for completing the evaluation details.
15 Scheduled Production Date Enter the scheduled date for beginning mass production.
Enter the scheduled date for delivery of the requested parts to the
16 Schedule Delivery Date
applicable facility.
Mass Production Important
Monitoring Items after Enter the predominant items for inspection after transition to mass
17
Transition to Mass Production production.
(general rule 1 month)
18 Honda　Response Column for Honda Use　Leave Blank Honda
19 Completed Date Enter the date the evaluation details were completed.
Enter decision after transition to mass production and completion
20 Supplier Evaluation Results
evaluation results.
Supplier
21 YYYY/MM/DD Enter the date of the decision for transition to mass production.
Submitter/Confirmation/Quality The submitter, confirmer, quality assurance representative or
22
Assurance Representative facility quality representative add their signature or seal.
23 Honda　Confirmation Column for Honda Use　Leave Blank Honda
※Before reporting, enter No. 1-17. When reporting evaluation results, enter 19-22.

11/15
July 1, 2014
9.4 Self-Controlled IPP Communication Form entry procedure

Issued on　　　2014/JAN/13
To:　Honda Motor Co.,Ltd.Suzuka Factory.Parts Quality Department
Company/Section Name (Inc.) JNCC　 Quality Assurance Division　 Inspection Department
Part No 42100－TF0－0030 Planned ○
Endo Sato Nishida
Part Name BEAM ASSY, RR AXLE Sudden
Yes/No Affected
①Welding Process (Inc.) JNCC→JEC (Inc.) ①welding process ・welding quality

Important Quality
Inspection Method Change

Yes No transfer of control due to ・parts accuracy

Characteristics
process reorganization ・parts strength
Material Change
Machine change
Jig, tool change
Tooling Change
②Welding Wire KC－28→KM－50S ②change due to ・welding wire chemicals
New supplier
Part Inspection
No relocation of line
Others
Criteria
③Shielding Gas CO2→Gas Blending Ar：CO2＝8：2 ③change due to
relocation of line
Part Approval No
④New Welding Jig ④launching new jigs due
to jig deterioration
Chemical
Yes No
Substance
Others ○ ○ ○ ○
Scheduled Date
CompletedDate
・requirement quality characteristics /
Date Date
evaluation results.
Standards have no difference in quality
process capabilities investigation (n=30) for goods before and after changes,
Process Function requirement quality whole entry Mar-14 Mar-14 Apr-14 May-14 and the process function is satisfied at
・macro examination （n=5）　by SX8 SPEC the same time. Maintenance of each
m as s production im portant report type and training is complete,
m onitoring item s and no problems are judged regarding
Validation Test ・unit endurance tester （n=1）　vibration endurance Apr-14 Apr-14 after trans ition to m as s mass production flow. 2014/Apr/21
production
（general rule 1 m onth ） QA Rep Confirmation Submitter
Process FMEA ・welding macro
（ Prevention）・process FMEA implementation of changing point inspection frequency
（ Outflow Prevention） entry
Mar-14 Feb-14
　once a week Endo Sato Nishida
（ Past Trouble Verification）　（ regular frequency once a
month）
IPP Measurement ・part accuracy （n=5） Apr-14 Apr-14 ・parts precision
measurement Section Name Section Name
　three coordinate
・Proces s Quality Control Table ・ process quality control table / process flow chart / measuring machine
Operation Control Standards arrangement sequence of components Mar-14 Feb-14 　continuously n=1/day
Revis ion/Es tablis hm ent ・operation standard establishment / training 　（ regular frequency testing YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD
・Operator Training Practice ・production conditions control chart revision device start n=1/day ）
　 Confirmation Submitter Receipt Confirmation Submitter
・factory person in charge
Others ・confirmation and revision of IMDS registration data Mar-14 Feb-14
on site rounds 1 time/day

12/15
July 1, 2014
9.5 IPP Control 〔IPP〕
該当箇所のNo.を○印する。　　CIRCLE APPLICABLE No.

１．　仕様変更初物　INITIAL PRODUCTION OF SPEC. CHANGE
1
２．　品質改善初物　QUALITY IMPROVEMENT ACTIVITY
３．　自主管理初物　VOLUNTARY INITIAL PARTS CONTROL
太線以外は、取引先又は発行部門で記入してください。（１．　先行確認　ADVANCED QUALITY CONFIRMATION）
TO BE COMPLETED B Y SUPPLIER EXCEPT WHERE IN DICATED IN BOLD （２．　初物提示　SU BMIT ACTUAL INITIAL PARTS）
初物管理〔初物品〕
管　理　Ｎo.
　CON TROL N o.
2 ①
INITIAL PRODUCTION PARTS
WHERE " A" AND "B" ARE COMMON, STRIKE OUT "A"
取引先又は発行課と最終搬入取引先が同一の場合上段を斜線のこと
　発行年月日
3
　DATE OF ISSUE
取　引　先　又　は　発　行　課発　　行　　者搬　入　数
A SUPPLIER OR DEPARTMENT ISSUING
DATE LOT N o.
PERSON ISSUIN G QUANTITY
4 5
最終搬入取引先発　　行　　者搬　入　数

B DATE LOT N o.
FIRST SUPPLIER PERSON ISSUIN G QUANTITY
6 7
部番　　　初物内容　HOW CHANGED
PART No.
8
部品名
PART NAME
仕様通知
SPEC. NOTICE No.
9
1 仕様変更 :SPEC CHANGE 6 機械変更 :MACHINE CHANGE

10
2 新規取引先 :NEW SUPPLIER 7 治工具変更 :JIG/ TOOL CHANGE
3 材料変更 :MATERIAL CHANGE 8 金型変更 DIE/ MOLD CHAN GE

CIRCLE APPLICABLE No.
該当箇所のＮo.を○印する。
4 加工条件・方法変更:MAN UFACTURING METHOD CHAN GE 9 検査方法変更 :INSPECTION METH OD CHANGE
5 工程系列変更 :MAN UFACTURING PROCESS ORDER CHAN 10 搬送方法・荷姿変更:TR A N SPOR TA TION ME TH OD /TYPE OF PA CKIN G CH A N GE
初物品には、検査成績表を添付し搬入して下さい。　DELIVER INITIAL PRODUCTION PARTS WITH INSPECTION RESU LT SH EETS.
　１）　本エフの①は、取引先又は発行部門控。　SHEET① MUST BE KEPT BY SUPPLIER OR DEPARTMENT ISSUING.
　２）　本エフの②③④は、各工程、取引先責任者のサインをして次工程に流してください。
SH EETS②③④ MU ST BE PASSED TO NEXT PROCESS WITH SIGNATURE OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON FOR TH E PROCESS.
責任者署名：SIGN ATURE OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON 量産移行判定
①　発行取引先　　②　中間工程取引先　　③　中間工程取引先可　・　否

DATE　　　DATE DATE
　　FOURTH SUPPLI 　THIRD SU PPLIER 　SECOND SUPPLIER PRODUCTION LINE
SUPPLY JUDGMENT
11
PASS・ FAIL
　　④　最終搬入取引先　　⑤　本田技研受付　　⑥　本田技研検査

DATE　　 DATE DATE
FIRST SUPPLIER HONDA RECEIPT HONDA INSPECTION
15
12 13 14
03011 検査部門控 16 保存期限：年

DU PLICATE FOR IN SPECTION DEPARTMENT RETENTION PERIOD，　　　　　　　 YEARS

13/15
July 1, 2014
9.6 IPP Control ( IPP) entry procedure
No. Item Description Who

－ General Use a diagonal line, etc. in the column to cross out items not Supplier
applicable.
Use the western calendar for dates.
Seal may be accepted in the signature field.
Regarding the circled number on copy, IPP tag is consisted of
4 sheets, with circled number specified accordingly to the
number of sheets. Here, it indicates the first sheet. First sheet
⇒① Second sheet⇒② Third sheet ⇒③ Fourth sheet ⇒④
1 Classification Circle applicable item number.
2 Control No. Enter IPP control number.
3 Date of issue Enter the date and year of IPP tag issue.
Supplier name or Use a diagonal line to cross out if supplier issuing IPP and
4 IPP issuing supplier delivering final products to Honda are the same.
section
5 IPP Issuer and If IPP issuer is different from supplier delivering parts to
delivery quantity Honda, enter the name of the section (supplier name) and
issuer, production date and delivery quantity, etc. in 4 and 5.
First supplier If the supplier issuing IPP and the supplier delivering final
6 (delivering products to Honda are the same, the IPP issuing supplier to
supplier) fill out section 6 & 7 with the name of the supplier, issuer,
quantity, etc.
7 IPP Issuer and If IPP issuer is different from the supplier delivering parts to
quantity delivered Honda, the delivering supplier to fill out section 6&7 with the
name of the supplier, issuer, production date and quantity, etc.
8 Part no.& name Enter part number and part name.
Enter revision number provided on the specification notice. If
Specification
9 no reservation number is provided, cross out with a diagonal
notice no.
line.
Circle applicable number and enter a brief description of the
10 IPP detail
reason for the change (diagram may be accepted).
Fourth supplier Enter the person in charge of releasing IPP and the date of
11
(issuing supplier) shipment.
First supplier (if the IPP originating supplier and the delivering supplier are
12 (delivering the same, the supplier delivers parts to Honda fill out with the
supplier) person responsible for delivery and delivery date.)
13 Receipt by Honda For Honda use only (no entry required). Honda
Inspection by
Honda
For Honda use only (no entry required).
※entry column for verification results from Honda upon return
Prior confirmation cases: Honda’s results of determining
Judgment for applicability to mass production and the judge
15
mass production IPP Presentation cases: Honda’s existing equipment
verification confirmation results
First products after mass production commencement cases:
Honda’s acceptance inspection results
Enter the retention period of IPP tags (15 years in western
16 Retention period supplier
calendar from issue)

14/15
July 1, 2014
9.7 IPP (supplemental tag)
初　　物
ＩＮＩＴＩＡＬ　ＰＲＯＤＵＣＴＩＯＮ　ＰＡＲＴＳ
SUPPLEMENTAL TAG　　
　　初物管理　№
　　INITIAL PRODUCTION
　　　　CONTROL №
　　１　仕　様　変　更　№ 初物品エフに記入の管理№
　　　　SPEC NOTICE № と同一№を記入する
　　２　新規取引先　　　NEW SUPPLIER
　　３　材料変更　　　　　　MATERIAL CHANGE Enter the same control
　　４　加工条件・方法変更　MANUFACTURING METHOD CHANGE number used in the IPP
　　５　工程系列変更　　　　MANUFACTURING PROCESS ORDER CHANGE tag.
　　６　機械変更　　　　　　MACHINE CHANGE
　　７　治工具変更　　　　　JIG/TOOL CHANGE
　　８　金型変更　　　　　　DIE/MOLD CHANGE
　　９　検査方法変更　　　　INSPECTION METHOD CHANGE
　　10　搬送方法・荷姿変更　TRANSPORATION METHOD/TYPE
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　OF PACKING CHANGE
　　該当№を○で囲んでください。 CIRCLE APPLICABLE №
　　仕様変更の場合は仕様変更№も記入して下さい。
　　IN CACE OF SPEC CHANGE ENTER NUMBER

15/15
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide requirements for reporting of corrective action in cases where
nonconformity occurs in quality of parts made by suppliers.
2) The supplier shall report corrective actions in accordance with requirements prescribed
by Honda.
2 Definitions
Definitions】.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall, in the case where nonconformity is detected at the supplier site and
where there is a possibility of the nonconforming product being flowed out to the delivery
destination, take corrective action in accordance with【SQM 4-5-1 Delivery Quality
Problem】.If there is no possibility of an outflow, the supplier shall follow its own procedure
to take corrective action and maintain records.
3.2 Where “Rejection Countermeasure Request” or “HTR (Honda Trouble Report)” is issued
by Honda, the supplier shall take corrective action in accordance with 【SQM 4-5-1
Delivery Quality Problem】.
Response to Honda shall be submitted directly using “Rejection Countermeasure
Request” (refer to section 6.1), or “HTR” (section 6.2) and etc.
The “Analysis Record [Analysis Report]“ (section 6.3 and 6.4) shall also be submitted
along with above documents upon Honda’s request or based on the supplier’s judgment
( Refer to 【SQM 5-4 5 Principles for Problem Solving】).
3.3 If requested by Honda to take corrective action and conduct analysis against
non-compliance by “Market Quality Information [Analysis/Countermeasure Request],” the
supplier shall repond to Honda using “Analysis Record [Analysis Report]”, etc. in
accordance with【SQM 4-5-2 Market Quality Problem】.
3.4 In the case where the response due date cannot be met, the supplier shall consult with
Honda, and if necessary, issue an interim report on “Rejection Countermeasure Request”,
“HTR”, or “Market Quality Information [Analysis/Countermeasure Request]”.
3.5 The supplier shall implement change point control for the initial parts to which corrective
action was taken in accordance with 【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】.
3.6 The supplier shall provide feedback on the results of corrective action to the new model
section and to the problem-causing source. The information shall be utilized for
recurrence prevention of nonconformity and/or prevention of potential problems.
3.7 If non-compliance or quality non-compliance originating from a sub-supplier occurs, the
supplier is responsible for implementing reliable countermeasures and preventive
measures（refer to 【SQM 2-4 Sub supplier quality assurance】）.
1 Rejection Countermeasure Request 5 years
2 Analysis Record [Analysis Report] 10 years

Records of corrective actions taken against
3 5 years
in-house problems

1/6
July 1, 2014
3) SQM 4-5-2 Market Quality Problem
4) SQM 5-4 5 Principals for Problem Solving

2/6
July 1, 2014
6 Forms
If using both “Rejection Countermeasure Request” or “HTR” and “Analysis Record [Analysis
Report]”, enter the date and number, etc., in order for the “Analysis Record [Analysis Report]”
referred to by the “Rejection Countermeasure Request” or “HTR” and “Analysis Record to be
identifiable.
6.1 “ Rejection Countermeasure Request ” entry procedure

Issuing date: 　 YYYY MM DD
Rejection Countermeasure Request T via
Issuing
o
Control No.
Person in
Approved by Confirmed by
Priority Subject charge
*1 N umber of
oc c urrenc e
Supplier No. Part No.
Discovering
Date of occurrence －－ section *1: For Honda use only (no entry required).
F m odel / type
Priority is determined by the following in-house criteria.
Fram e No. Importance ranking for nonconformities
E model / type Importance
Definition
Engine No. Rank
Transmission №, etc. Nonconformities which cause or may cause the following phenomena.
(1) Condition that disables vehicle operation (run, steer, or stop).
Destination/Transmission Des tination Trans m is s ion (2) Condition that associated with electrification, burn, or injury.
Category ＡＴＭＴＣＶＴ A (3) Condition that associated with fire
(4) Condition that associated with pollution.
Where to call To (Extension ) (5) Condition that disables protection of vehicle occupants.
(6) Others which do not conform to regulations.
Conditions which are described under A and which significantly impair
Reply deadline ： YYYY MM DD B
functions and merchantability of products.
Where to reply ： To C Conditions not described in A or B.
Counterm easure (If there is not enough space to enter, an attachm ent
Result of investigation / analysis and cause
s heet m ay be us ed.)
-Enter the cause and details of improvement measures.

If using an attachment sheet, enter the title of the attachment, date and so on.
(Example) : For details, see "Analysis Record [Analysis Report], titled ".........", dated XX, XX
2008.
-If it is an interim report, enter the reason.
-Circle the applicable category.

-If the final report will not be ready until after the reply deadline,
prepare an intermediate report.
-The "final report" is defined as a report after permanent
countermeasure parts are adopted by a supplier.
So, it is not a final report until countermeasure parts are put into
use.
*To be filled by Supplier
Category of reply (interm ediate / final)
② Date on which counterm easures taken, product num ber, etc. Countermeasure request section:
Category
Counterm eas ure / reply s ection:

-Enter supplier name and section name
YYYY MM DD Model Type Product num ber
③ -Enter the date of report (YYYY/MM/DD). Date:
-Approval field … Rank A: Person responsible for quality assurance or for
YYYY MM
Person in Pers on in
Date Approved by Confirmed by
charge
Approved byConfirm ed
the quality of a facility. Rank B/C: Head of a section responsible for quality. by
charge
(YYYY/MM/DD) -Supplier signature (pencil not permitted): signature or seal.
- If it is an interim report, first make a photocopy of the form with the
signature field blank, then sign on the photocopy.
Confirmation after countermeasure Issuing section or i nspecti on secti on Chief Inspecting Engineer
Occurrence after Person in

countermeasure ： No ・ Yes Date of occurrence: Approved by
Confi rmed b
charge
Model, type, s erial num ber, etc.:
Model / name checked ： All ・ Limited 〔Nam e ：〕〕
Note
Date on which confirmation has been completed YYYY/MM/DD
07121 Original to be retained until: YYYY/MM

3/6
July 1, 2014
6.2 HTR
(INITIAL) (ANSWER)
TO A TTN : F R OM: TO A TTN : F R OM:
D A TE: DA TE :
MGR : MGR :
A MGR : A MGR :
ISSU E : ISSU E:
DIST TROUBLE REPORT

MOD EL TR OU B LE R E POR T N O. TR OU B LE CA TEGOR Y
PA R T N U MB E R R EPOR TE D B Y 1.SH OR TA GE
U N PA CK D A TE 2.WR ON G PA R TS SH IPPED
PA R T N A ME TR OU B LE PA R T QTY/TOTA L PA R T QTY 3.DA MA GE
4.R U ST
PC N O: PA R TS R E PA IR A B LE 5.DE F E CTIV E PA R TS
LOT N O: PA R TS N OT R EPA IR A B LE 6.R E PLA CEMEN T B Y D /C
CA SE N O: CON D ITION OF N E XT LOT 7.OTH E R
REPLACEMENT E A T A H EA D QTY SH IPPIN G B OA T

PARTS N ECESSA R Y COLOR ME TH OD A IR
N OT N E CE SSA R Y R TA OTH E R
DETAILS : (EX. PIC T URE)
ANSWER
T/R E POR T N O PA R T R E PLA CE ME N T QTY
P/C N O ＥＴＡ B OA T A IR OTH E R
ＤＥＴＡＩＬＳ：

4/6
July 1, 2014
6.3 ”Analysis Record [Analysis Report]” Blank

YYYY/MM/DD
Created Section
Theme Analysis Record [ Analysis Report ]
Approved by Confirmed by Created by
Part No.
Part
Name
Occurrence Situation
(Symptom, complaint, number of occurrences, treatment) Determine the facts (part analysis, factor analysis, production quality status )
Appropriate countermeasures Confirmation of C/M Effectiveness (Effectiveness

Find the Cause (Occurrence mechanism, reproduction test, why why analysis) (Detail, estimated effects, PPA) history)
Feedback to the Source (Reflection on system &

mechanism)
Why Why Analysis

Steps 1 2 3 4 5
Occur-
Contents
rence
Out-
flow
９９１２２ Original to be retained until: / (YYYY/MM):

5/6
July 1, 2014
6.4 “Analysis Record [Analysis Report] “entry procedure

Enter the supplier name, a making section name. Enter the date of issue.
YYYY/MM/DD
Created Section
Theme Analysis Record [ Analysis Report ]
Approved Confirmed Created by
Part No. Enter brief description of the model, part name, symptom, etc.
Part If "Rejection Countermeasure Request" or "Market Quality Information [Analysis,
Name Countermeasure Request 〕" have already been issued, use the same theme title.
Occurrence Situation Creator, confirmer and approver sign in the appropriate boxes.
(Symptom, complaint, number of occurrences, treatment) Determine the facts (Part analysis, factor analysis, production quality status )
-Enter model and type. 1. Enter the outline (measurements) of the troubled area. 4. Enter the quality status of parts currently under production
-Enter occurrence date. ①Enter trouble area clearly.
-Enter where the problem occurred. (In the market, at Honda) (acknowledge the current status through x-R control chart, histogram,
②Enter results against criteria/standards. process capability index)
-Enter the number of occurrences.
(assembled condition, damage, accuracy, material, strength, etc.) 5. Understand the applicable scope of occurrence (occurrence ratio, or,
-Mileage, registration date ,frame no. (if it occurred in the market)
-Symptom or claim at the time of trouble occurrence. ③Enter lot number of concerned parts clearly. number of units) along with its evidence.
-Enter details of corrective action taken for the problem model or ④Enter summary of conclusion from the claim part analysis. Make an estimate based on changes made to lot, man, model,
parts. equipment,condition, operation methods, or environment
Enter the name of consistuting parts (ASSY parts, COMP parts) 2. Enter results of reproducibility test, etc.
-The production plant where the nonconforming of products has
occurred. 3. Enter factor analysis for problem occurrence.
(Supplier name, Facility name) ・ Analysis through cause and effect diagram or FMEA, KT method
-Enter the production date of when the nonconforming product ・ Verification of cause and fact
occurred ①Enter investigation results of occurrence factors and outflow factors.
Describe the situation of products in the production line at the time.
*Do not enter "number" of the item ・Enter results of investigation on the situation at the time of discovery of the problem lot (any changes to 4Ms or not) .
*Enter any necessary information if there are any besides the
・Enter investigation results of history of the same symptoms in the past.
above.
② Verify causes resulted in the occurrence, after having lined up procedures and rules defined in Operation Standards.
③Enter specifically what was the problem and what was missing.
-Countermeasure request receipt date (In the last line, enter the date
agreed upon with the requesting department.)
Appropriate Countermeasure
Find the Cause (Occurrence mechanism, reproduction test, why why analysis) (Detail, estimated effects, PPA) Confirmation of C/M Effectiveness (actual outcome)
1. Describe the causes of outbreak factor and outflow factor. 1. Enter description of C/M. 1. Describe confirmed outcomes of C/M or timing of the confirmation
either at the manufacturing process or in the market.
・ Investigate the cause through cause and effect diagram, FMEA, KT method ・ Decide the measures to take (such as KT method)
・Describe the outcomes by comparing the difference of quality data,
・ Cause of manufacturing problems must be determined down to tangible factors ・Devide the C/M into occurrence and outflow factors.
Make sure that the C/M is taken to intangible attributes, quantity, etc. before and after of taking measures.
(such as equiment, jigs, inspection tools)
If the cause is due to intangible factors, conduct interviews with the persons involved even if the cause was originated in human errors.
with the failure at the time of occurrence, and determine the facts. 2. Enter the date of C/M, applicable parts, model, VIN No. etc.
2. describe reproducibility, etc. of the symptom against the cause. 3. Describe predection of C/M effectiveness for temporary C/M
(Verify by reproduction test, work-site, reality). or for permanent C/M.
：Example
C/M for 4. Describe countermeasure for already-
Cause of Cause
Occurrence shipped units.(Parts,Product)
①・・・・・
①・・・・・・ ②・・・・・ 5. Enter the necessity of handling parts stock
②・・・・・・ ③・・・・・ 6.Enter PPA of the countermeasure
③・・・・・・ C/M for Feedback to the Source (Reflection on system & mechanism)
Cause of Outflow
①・・・・・ 1. Describe factors, which countermeasure for tangible attributes was
Outflow
②・・・・・ taken to and will be continuously maintained, to reflect to the system.
①・・・・・・ (Design requirements, Drawing, Reference, and Standards)
②・・・・・・ 2. Include a system that eleminated factors of the true causes
(includes horizontal development).
・Cross-cutting/horizontal approach to similar processes/lines
Why Why Analysis ・ Standards, criteria, accumulation of know-how and techniques
Steps 1 2 3 4 5
Occur Enter the process of finding out causes. (occurrence factors, outflow factors)
Contents
-rence
Characteristics of Why? (true causes）
Why? Why? Why?
problems
Out-
flow
99122 Original to be retained until: YYYY/MM

6/6
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide requirements for the handling of delivery quality problem in the case
where nonconformity is found in parts delivered from a supplier to Honda or to a delivery
destination specified by Honda.
2) The supplier shall, in accordance with requirements prescribed by Honda, define
procedures to eliminate nonconforming parts from Honda, and prevent nonconforming
parts from being flowed out to the market.
2 Definitions
Terms and Definitions】for other terms.
No. Term Definition
Concession is the act of using raw materials, parts, etc. that do
not conform to specified requirements in limited quantities or for
a certain time period.
1 Concession
However, those which affect product safety, prevention of
environmental pollution, and/or regulatory compliance of
products shall be exempt from the scope of concession.
Nonconforming Parts that do not conform to drawings (specifications included) or
2
parts limit samples.
Honda (including destinations of service parts and KD parts) or
3 Delivery destination
designated suppliers to which supply parts are delivered.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall, if nonconformity is found and if there is a possibility of the
nonconforming parts delivered to a delivery destination, immediately contact the delivery
destination with information including the following, and determine actions to take.
1) Part name and part number

2) Place of delivery
3) Date of delivery and lot number of parts delivered.
4) Details of nonconformity
5) Instructions for delivery destinations to distinguish nonconforming parts
6) Cause of nonconformity
7) Details and timing of countermeasures (delivery of replacement parts included)
8) Identification method for conforming parts after countermeasure taken.
3.2 The supplier shall, if notified that nonconformity or possible nonconformity is found at a
delivery destination, consult with the delivery destination and determine actions to take,
along with the following.
1) Investigate in-process parts and stock parts for possible nonconformity, and identify
the scope of nonconformity.
2) Investigate outflows of nonconforming parts to other locations. If possible outflow is
detected, contact the delivery destination concerned and take appropriate actions in
accordance with section 3.1.
3) Investigate the cause of nonconformity.
4) Contact delivery destination with information on details and timing of measures to
take (delivery of replacement parts included).
5) Identification method for conforming parts to which measures were taken.

1/6
July 1, 2014
3.3 The supplier shall, if Rejection Countermeasure Request or HTR is issued by the delivery
destination after actions described in section 3.1 and 3.2 are agreed, respond to such
request by the specified date (refer to【SQM 4-5 Corrective Action Report】) .
3.4 Identification and Quarantine of Nonconforming Parts
3.4.1 Nonconforming Parts at Delivery Destination
The supplier shall, when provided by the delivery destination, following instructions
on identification and quarantine of nonconforming or possible nonconforming parts
at the delivery destination.
3.4.2 Nonconforming Parts before Delivery
The supplier shall, if nonconformity is detected in parts before delivery, identify
nonconforming parts by marking, tagging, using different containers, etc., and
distinguish them from normal parts.
3.5 Type of Action After Deliberation
3.5.1 Sorting
The supplier shall sort and separate nonconforming parts from delivered parts, if so
requested by the delivery destination.
3.5.2 Concession
If the nonconformity does not affect product safety, prevention of environmental
pollution, or regulatory compliance, and does not impair the function of Honda
products, the supplier may apply for a concession of parts, including ones being
repaired in accordance with section 3.4.3.
3.5.2.1 The supplier shall complete “Repair Record [Concession Request]” form
found in section 8 with required information, and submit to Honda.
1) Model: name of the model for which a concession is requested.
2) Part number, part name: part number and name subject to concession
3) Quantity: total number of parts subject to concession
4) Scheduled date of delivery: enter the date of scheduled delivery using the
western calendar.
5) Nature of nonconformity: details of nonconformity resulted in a concession.
6) Future action: recurrence prevention measures.
7) Diagram: a sketch describing the details of nonconformity.
3.5.2.2 The supplier shall receive “Repair Record [Concession Request]” from
Honda and confirm the decision of concession.
3.5.2.3 When delivering concession parts, attach “Repair Record [Concession
Request]” received from Honda to the initial delivery lot of parts. Parts accepted
by concession shall be identified from conforming products for each release lot.
3.5.3 Repair
The supplier may perform repair and correct nonconformity if so approved by the
delivery destination. Where correction is deemed possible, the supplier shall
propose repair to the delivery destination. The place for performing repair, for
instance at the delivery destination or at the supplier site, shall be included in the
proposal.
For parts that are rendered nonconforming as a result of repair, follow concession
procedure set forth in section 3.5.2, or they shall be disposed in accordance with
section 3.5.4 without repair.
3.5.3.1 The supplier shall, when repairing nonconforming parts recovered from the
delivery destination, re-inspect repaired parts. The re-inspection shall be
performed by the person responsible for the inspection concerned. Obtain
approval of the inspection results from the delivery destination. Attach an IPP
tag specified by Honda to the repaired parts if re-delivering to the delivery
destination (refer to 【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】).
3.5.3.2 The supplier shall obtain approval of the result if repairs of nonconforming
parts are performed at the delivery destination.

2/6
July 1, 2014
3.5.4 Disposition
The supplier shall identify nonconforming parts to dispose by a mark, tag, container,
etc. and separate from conforming parts until the parts are disposed. Honda may
possibly dispose the parts concerned.
3.5.5 Actions To Take When Nonconforming Parts Are Used
The supplier shall comply with instructions given by the delivery destination for
replace, repair, etc. if it becomes clear that nonconforming parts have been used by
the delivery destination.
4 Key point
1) The supplier shall give consideration to sorting operations, such as assigning associates
with knowledge of the inspection concerned, to prevent errors in sorting of parts.
1 Repair and re-inspection record 5 years
1) SQM 4-4 Change point control

3/6
July 1, 2014
7 Flowchart
Supplier Honda
Contact
Discovery of
Discovery of problem problem parts. Receiving
parts Preliminary analysis Quality
Section
Issue Rejection
Countermeasure
Request
Investigate if problem
or HTR (Honda
parts w ere shipped out
Trouble Report)
NG to the destination.
OK
Take measures
to the parts
Notify
Examine
delivery destinations
Production Stage
Analyze causes and

take measures.
Receiving
Handling of problem Quality
parts
Section
Dispose Identify parts

parts to be disposed Return
Modify
Inspect
Judge NG Receiving
NG or OK
Put back into Quality
manufacturing
OK Section
process
Concession
Concession
Request
Judge NG
NG or OK Procurement
Section
Put back into
manufacturing
OK
Reply to
process
Rejection
Countermeasure
Examine
Request,
or HTR
Legend: 　　　　　　For cases when supplier applies for concession.

4/6
July 1, 2014
8 Forms
8.1 Repair Record [Concession Request] form
Control Number
Repair Record [Concession Request] ② Issued : YYYY/MM/DD
Ｓ・Ｍ･Ｃ・Ｙ・Ｋ・Ｔ
Model Part Number Part Name Applying Department
Department Manager Person in Charge
Supplier Code No. Supplier Name No. of Con. Req. Planned delivery date
Illustration
・Description of Problem
・C/M
*Attach a separate sheet if unable to fill in here.
Concession
Department Approval
Contents Approval
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Confirmation
Machining (Required / Not required) Functions, Performance (Required / Not Required) Prior Confirmation (Required / Not Required)
Assembly (Required / Not required) VIN No. Confirmation (Required / Not required)
APPROVAL ・ Condition/Reason Quality Manager

JUDGED BY
Approved Rejected
Date: YYYY/MM/DD
Signatures of Confirmation-Process Managers
E№ YYYY/MM/DD
APPLIED
VIN
F№ YYYY/MM/DD
・ Manufacturing Instruction No. ・Repair Record [Concession Request] Processing Sequence

SPECIAL NOTE
Applying (Occurred
Applying Attach Final Sect.
Q. Related Q. Applying Promo. Assembly In-house)
Sec. Supplier to Inspection
Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec
article Sec. Quality (Occurred
Section at
supplier)
95121 Original to be retained until　: YYYY/M

5/6
July 1, 2014
8.2 Repair Record [Concession Request] entry procedure

Circle applicable SS (factory) symbol.
Repair Record [Concession Request] ② Issued : YYYY/MM/DD Control Number
Ｓ・Ｍ･Ｃ・Ｙ・Ｋ・Ｔ
Model Part Number Part Name Applying Department
Enter model name, part number, and part name applying for the concession.
Department Manager Person in Charge
Supplier Code No. Supplier Name No. of Con. Req. Planned delivery date
Illustration
Enter supplier code no. and supplier name.
Enter the date based on the western calendar

・Description of Problem Enter the number of that concession parts are planned to be
applicable concession parts. delivered.
Enter description of the problem which is the reason for requesting concession.
Enter schematic drawing of the
problem, etc.
・C/M
Enter preventive measures against recurrence of the concession. ＊To be completed
by Supplier
*Attach a separate sheet if unable to fill in here.
Concession
Department Approval
Contents Approval
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
CONF
Machining (Required / Not required) Functions, Performance (Required / Not Required) Prior Confirmation (Required / Not Required)
Assembly (Required / Not required) VIN No. Confirmation (Required / Not required)
APPROVAL ・ Condition/Reason Quality Manager

JUDGED BY
Approved Rejected
Date: YYYY/MM/DD
Signatures of Confirmation-Process Managers
E№ YYYY/MM/DD
APPLIED
VIN
F№ YYYY/MM/DD
・ Manufacturing Instruction No. ・Repair Record [Concession Request] Processing Sequence

SPECIAL NOTE
Applying (Occurred
Applying Attach Final Sect.
Q. Related Q. Applying Promo. Assembly In-House)
Sec. Supplier to Inspection
Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec
article Sec. Quality (Occurred
Section at
Supplier)
95121 Original to be retained until　: YYYY/MM

6/6
July 1, 2014
1 Overview
1) Honda shall, where problem occurs in the market after products are sold, and where the
problem is deemed attributable to the supplier from which the concerned parts were
purchased, request the supplier to perform analysis of the problem and to take preventive
measures against recurrence.
2) The supplier shall analyze market problems required by Honda, and if it is attributable to
its own conduct, take measures to prevent the problem from recurring.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A part that was recovered from a marketed product as a possible
1 Call-in part problem part and collected from the market by Honda for
analysis of causes.
3 Requirements
3.1 Analysis and Measures of Market Quality Problem
3.1.1 The supplier shall, if Honda issues “Market Quality Information [Analysis /
Countermeasure Request], analyze the details of the problem in compliance with the
request, and take measures if the cause is attributable to its conduct.
3.1.2 The supplier shall respond to Honda by submitting an “Analysis Record [Analysis
Report]” with photographs, data, etc. attached by the date specified on “Market
Quality Information [Analysis / Countermeasure Request]
(refer to 【 SQM 4-5 Corrective Action Report 】 for the use of [Analysis /
Countermeasure Request]) .
3.1.3 The supplier shall, if response due date cannot be met, issue an interim report
including reasons for the delay.
3.1.4 The supplier shall obtain call-in parts and related information from Honda for
improvement of part quality and reliability. The supplier shall be aware of how its
parts affect customers of Honda products, and perform analysis of problems in a
positive manner.
3.2 Monitoring o of Market Quality Information
3.2.1 The supplier shall review, monitor, and analyze market quality information via
electronic data distributed by Honda, and continuously seek to reduce market quality
problems.
3.2.2 The supplier may request Honda for additional call-in parts, if the need for further
investigation arises from a result of its own autonomous analysis on market quality
information. However, Honda may confer with the supplier for reimbursement of
transportation costs, etc. incurred due to recovery of the parts.
3.2.3 The supplier shall report the results of investigation, analysis, etc. to Honda’, if
received call-in parts from Honda.
3.2.4 The supplier shall define procedures for control and storage of recovered parts and
related information provided by Honda, and store them properly. The recovered parts
shall be disposed of by a method provided by and agreed with a providing section of
Honda after completion of investigation and analysis (after reporting to Honda) or
after conclusion of agreements on warranty claim.

1/3
July 1, 2014
4 Key point
1) When identifying the subject parts at the time of nonconformity occurrence, all
manufacturing lots including ones shipped to overseas facilities shall be included in the
scope.
1 Supporting data to Analysis Record [Analysis Report] 10 years
7 Flowchart
7.1 Flowchart for treating market quality information.
Supplier Honda
Contact
Monitor and analyze market Obtain market quality Market

quality information information and actual parts Quality
Primary analysis Section
Request collection of
Collection
problem parts.
Market
Obtain market quality Request supplier to provide

information and actual parts analysis and contermeasure Quality
Market Quality
Section
Information
[Analysis/Countermeasur
　Analysis, C/M and reccurence
e Request]
prevention.
　・Verify accuracy of parts
・Verify processes.
・reproduction test
　・countermeasure
　・Recurrence prevention, etc.
Market
Report results Verify results
Quality
Analysis Record Section
[Analysis Report]

2/3
July 1, 2014
7.2 Flowchart for scope identification when nonconformity occurs.
Supplier Honda
Contact
Market
Information Quality
Section
・problem description
・part name
・part number
・vehicle identification
number
・date of production
Verify production history

・check shipping records
・examine change points, etc.
in the manufacturing process.
・determine production volume

・investigate sub-suppliers, etc.
　Identify the scope of the problem

※including those that were shipped
out to other Honda facilities overseas.
　Notify the scope and destination of

problem parts.
Market
Identify the scope Quality
Section
Market
Take
Quality
countermeasure
Section

3/3
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide requirements to ensure a smooth implementation of the specification
change issued by Honda to suppliers.
2) The supplier shall establish procedures to process specification changes to parts in
accordance with the requirements of Honda.
2 Definitions
No Term Definition
A change to the entry in the field for notating changes to
Specification
1 component parts in the product drawing or specification change
change
notice.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall respond to Honda by the date specified, if Honda requests a survey for
specification change by issuing a specification change questionnaire or by other means.
3.2 The supplier shall implement the following when Honda issues a specification change
notice.
3.2.1 Review concerned drawings (specifications, etc. included) by using electronic data
processing system or other methods. The drawings (specifications, etc. included),
may be provided along with the specification change notice.
3.2.2 The supplier shall, when received a specification change notice, review details of
the change, examine the following items, and respond to Honda by the date
specified.
1) Application timing
2) Compensation for tooling
3) Compensation for parts
4) Changes in cost
5) Remarks and others
3.2.3 If prior confirmation is required in the specification change instruction, follow the
procedure set forth in【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】for the confirmation.
3.2.4 If the need arises to change Process FMEA, process quality control table,
operation standard, etc. along with the specification change, implement such
changes.
3.2.5 Comply with 【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】for IPP control as a result of
specification change.
3.2.6 If the need arises to change the application timing stated in specification change
notice, immediately inform Honda of new timing of application.
4 Key point
1) The order of specification change shall be controlled by the order in which the changes
were applied. The supplier shall verify the revision level when using drawings.
Initial Product Control [Initial
1 15 years
Production Part]
2 Inspection data attached to IPP 15 years

1/2
July 1, 2014
7 Flowchart to be followed when a specification change is directed by Honda.
Supplier Honda
Contact
Issue Specification Procurement
Investigate Change Questionnaire Section
Return by the date

Fill in the specified
questionnaire
Issue Specification Procurement
Change Notice Section
Verify drawings, etc.

Complete
Return within 5
Specification Change business days. Procurement
Receive Section
Notice
When application timing

Revise process quality notified was changed Procurement
Receive
control table, operation Section
standard, etc.
Apply specification
change
Control change points

(IPP control)
See 【SQM 4-4 Change Point Control】

2/2
July 1, 2014

1 Overview
1) Honda shall provide suppers with procedure for requesting a specification change.
2) The supplier shall request Honda for a specification change while identifying the need for
specification change.
2 Definitions
No Term Definition
An action to be taken by a supplier to request Honda for a change
Countermeasure
1 to the drawings (specifications, etc., included) by using
request
“Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure Request Form]”.
3 Requirements
3.1 The supplier shall make a countermeasure request to Honda for a specification change
of parts by submitting a “Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure Request Form] “set
forth in section 6
The supplier shall review the following items before making a countermeasure request
and clearly define the need for the specification change by providing the related data
attached.
1) Purpose of the countermeasure request (e.g. quality improvement, workability
improvement, cost reduction, etc.)
2) Evidence for the validity of the countermeasure request (e.g. prove that the root
cause of a problem is attributable to the specification).
3) History of previous countermeasure requests of the same kind (e.g. if a duplicate
request exists, investigate the reason for the request not being processed).
4) Effectiveness of a countermeasure request (e.g. if a specification change is effective
to solve problem and if the change will not cause secondary problems).
5) Cost performance (e.g. if the benefits will justify increased costs for parts)
3.2 The supplier shall submit “Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure Request Form]
“to Honda’s purchasing-cost or procurement section.
Countermeasure requests shall be submitted prior to establishing permanent tooling at
the production preparation stage, however, in cases where one of the following
conditions applies, submission of a countermeasure request on a case-by-case basis will
be accepted.
1) Countermeasure request for regulatory or safety noncompliance issues.
2) Countermeasure request which may result in an increase in production capability, a
significant increase in workability or quality, or a significant reduction in costs, etc.
3) Countermeasure request which is not for current parts, but is expected to apply in
the future.
3.3 The supplier shall receive a decision from Honda for the proposed”Countermeasure
Request [Countermeasure Request Form] “.
Countermeasure Request
1 5 years
[Countermeasure Request Form]
Supporting data to Countermeasure
2 5 years
Request [Countermeasure Request Form]

1/9
July 1, 2014
6 Forms
6.1 Countermeasure Request Form (blank)
対策要求[対策要求票] 試作・量産 □立上
重要度 PRIORITY 発行DATE：・・
COUNTERMEASURE REQUEST FORM START UP 推進No．／
PROTOTYPE ・ MASSPRODUCTION Ａ・Ｂ・Ｃ CTRL．No．
申請区（REQUEST DEPT．）ＴＥＬＮo．：購買 CP．資材 PUR 品管 QCD 認証 CERTF Ｅ部門 SS 設計 DES．Ｄ部門 HG
DATE：・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
責任者責任者担当者責任者責任者責任者責任者最終責任者責任者最終責任者
RESP． RESP． CHARGE RESP． RESP． RESP． RESP． FINAL RESP. RESP． FINAL RESP.
機種：イベント：カテゴリー：部品名：

MODEL： EVENT： CATEGORY： P NAME：
標題：部番：
TITLE： DWG No.：
目的： CODE 原因： CODE 仕向地：通知 No.：

PURPOSE： No.： CAUSE： No.： VARIATION： REVIS No.：
－－
内容
DESCRIPTION
対策案項目ＯＬＤＮＥＷ差 DIFF.

PROPOSED COUNTERMEASURE
COST変動（円）
COST DIEF．(＄/￡）
WT　変動　（g）
WT　DIEF.　(g)
新規追加投資
INVESTMENT
［千/＄/￡］
損失［千/＄/￡］
(型修正､廃却）
LOS　(DIE　REP．)
管理費 OVERHEAD
　　［千/＄/￡］
型改修日程確　認
DIE　MODIFICATION CHECK
SCHEDULE
品管部門 QCD．（課） SECT.

SPR
HS
関連部門 RELATED DEP. （課） SECT. 認証部門 CERTIFICATION DEPT.
回答部門記入欄 COLUMN OF REPLYING DEPT.

返却保留
OK NG RETURN HOLD
部門名担当予定日：
・・
DEPT. CHARGE EXPECT DATE：
通知 No.：
REVIS No：－－

2/9
July 1, 2014
6.2 Countermeasure request form (entry procedure 1/7)
対策要求[対策要求票] 試作・量産 □立上
重要度 PRIORITY 発行DATE：・・ ⑤
COUNTERMEASURE REQUEST FORM START UP 推進No．／
PROTOTYPE ・ MASSPRODUCTION Ａ・Ｂ・Ｃ CTRL．No．
申請区（REQUEST DEPT．）ＴＥＬＮo．： ⑥-b 購買 CP．資材 PUR 品管 QCD 認証 CERTF Ｅ部門 SS 設計 DES．Ｄ部門 HG
DATE： ⑥-c
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
責任者責任者担当者責任者責任者責任者責任者最終責任者責任者最終責任者
⑥-a RESP． RESP． CHARGE RESP． RESP． RESP． RESP． FINAL RESP. RESP． FINAL RESP.
⑥-d ⑥-e
機種：
MODEL： ⑨-a イベント：
EVENT： ⑩-a カテゴリー：
CATEGORY： ⑩-b 部品名：
P NAME： ⑪-a
標題：
TITLE：
⑨-b 部番：
DWG No.：
⑪-b
目的：
PURPOSE：
CODE
No.： ⑫ 原因：
CAUSE：
CODE
No.： ⑬ 仕向地：
VARIATION： ⑭ 通知 No.：
REVIS No.：
－ ⑮－
内容
DESCRIPTION
対策案項目ＯＬＤＮＥＷ差 DIFF.

PROPOSED COUNTERMEASURE
COST変動（円） ⑱-a
COST DIEF．(＄/￡）
WT　変動　（g）
WT　DIEF.　(g)
⑱-b
新規追加投資
INVESTMENT ⑱-c
［千/＄/￡］
⑰ 損失［千/＄/￡］
(型修正､廃却） ⑱-d
LOS　(DIE　REP．)
管理費 OVERHEAD
　　［千/＄/￡］
⑱-e
型改修日程確　認
DIE　MODIFICATION
SCHEDULE
⑱-f CHECK
品管部門 QCD．（課） SECT.

SPR
HS
関連部門 RELATED DEP. （課） SECT. 認証部門 CERTIFICATION DEPT.
回答部門記入欄 COLUMN OF REPLYING DEPT.

返却保留
OK NG RETURN HOLD
部門名担当予定日：
・・
DEPT. CHARGE EXPECT DATE：
通知 No.：
REVIS No：－－
94041

3/9
July 1, 2014
Countermeasure request form (entry procedure 2/7)

6.2.1 Issuing of Countermeasure Request Form
6.2.1.1 Submit one page for one case
In cases where there are numerous part numbers (parts and models, etc.), a
list may be attached on a separate sheet.
6.2.1.2 Requirements for Issuing Countermeasure Request Form
Note1) If entry is unnecessary, or the subject is non-applicable, write a
forward slash in the entry field.
Note2 ） The ‘’P S M’’ in the ‘’entered by’’ column indicate that entry is
necessary in the P, S, and M periods respectively. (prototype, start-up, mass
production)
Note3) When applying from an electronic processing system, etc., the
standard's content will be changed to match the format.
NO Item Description
①～④ For Honda use only (no number is provided in entry procedure 1/6).
⑤ Page Enter the total number of pages as the denominator.
⑥ Request ⑥-a Request dept: enter the company name, plant name and section
department name.
⑥-b Phone number: enter the phone number.
⑥-c Date: Enter the date (month, date, and year) on which the
responsible person signed.
⑩-Enter other dates in the same manner.
Ref) date (Arabic numerals), month (English) and year ( last 2
digits of the year in the western calendar)
⑥-d Responsible person (left): if not applicable, cross out with a
diagonal line.
Responsible person (center): enter the name of the person
responsible for the entry of data into this form.
⑥-e Person prepared (right) : person who prepared this form.
⑦、⑧ For Honda use only (no number is provided in entry procedure 1/6).

4/9
July 1, 2014
Countermeasure request form (Entry procedure 3/7)

NO Item Description
⑨ Model ⑨-a Enter the code of a model subject to countermeasure (code).
Enter the part type number provided in the “DWG No.” section
(part number or drawing number) in the drawing title block.
In cases where multiple model names do not fit in the entry
section, enter the information in the description column or attach
on a separate sheet.
Drawing title block
(Example)
※Check the
DWG.No
section in the
drawing title
block (in the
boxed area)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15
－－－
主 No 部品類別 No 種別 No. 補足 No.

Main No. Part category. Type No. Supplemental No
試作記号
Prototype code
Enter the part number provided in the DWG No. in the drawing title
block or part category number of the drawing number.
Title ⑨-b Explain details of the request briefly with part name, expected
outcomes (target),etc. (example: heat resistance of XX,
interference prevention for XX, etc.)
⑩ Event ⑩-a Enter the event if there is one that resulted in a request and it is
necessary to specify.
However, if the event is unknown or the necessity of entry is not
certain, consult Honda before making an entry. If the entry of event
is needed, cross out this section with a diagonal line.
Category ⑩-b Enter the category of subject parts. Consult Honda if information to
be included in this section is unknown before making an entry.
E.g.: B-F21

5/9
July 1, 2014

NO Item Description
⑪ Part Name ⑪-a Enter the name of the subject parts.
Enter the information provided in the NAME section (part name or
drawing name) in the drawing title block.
Drawing title field

(Example)
※Check the
NAME section
in the drawing
title block (in
the boxed
area).
Enter the part name or drawing name in the latest drawing in full.
Part ⑪-b Enter the number of the subject part or drawing.
Number or If applicable, enter the information provided in the DWG.No.
Drawing section (part number or drawing number) in the drawing title block.
Number
Drawing title block
(Example)
※Check the
NAME section
in the drawing
title block (in
the boxed
area).
※ Enter part name or drawing name in the latest drawing in full.

※Do not enter the prototype part number during mass production
countermeasure requests or the facility preparation part number.
※If a countermeasure request is made for multiple parts, all part
numbers or drawing numbers of own production that may be
affected are included in the part number section or in a separate
sheet.
※If more than two countermeasure requests are made for a part,
prepare a countermeasure request form for each case.

6/9
July 1, 2014

NO Item Description
⑫ Code No. Enter the applicable purpose code number (refer to the following table).
No. Purpose of CM Request
1 Quality (except no. 2 through no. 5).
2 Improve durab lity (strength, weather resistance, heat
resistance, low-temperature res stance)
3 Eliminate interference and secure clearance (except wiring
or piping).
4 Improve wiring and piping.
5 Improve anticorrosive quality.
6 Improve marketable value ( except no.7)
7 Reduce vibration and noise, and improve steering stability
and ride quality.
8 Improve maintainability.
9 Increase productivity (process ability, workability)
10 Facilitate common use and consolidation.
11 Carry out VA and reduce cost.
12 Maker/supplier layout.
13 Facilitate procurement.
14 Simplify parts control.
15 Comply with criteria, standards, or regulations.
16 Response to patent issues.
17 Correct errors in bill of material and drawing, and put them
(except 18) in order.
18 Rationalize drawing formation.
19 Release finished drawing.
20 Address problem for in-use vehicle.
21 Meet special procurement demand.
22 Add specification (including knock-down parts).
23 Others (no responsible section).
“Purpose code list” for motorcycle and power equipment.

No. Purpose of request
1 Improve merchantability/marketable value
(appearance value, reliability, workability/operatability,
comfortableness, function)
2 Improve productivity
(yield rate, formability, process ability, machining accuracy,
heat treatment, surface treatment)
3 Improve operatability ( workability, assemleability, control)
4 Facilitate procurement (change of M/L, sourcing or
manufacturing method)
5 VA, cost reduction (consolidation, common use and
lightening of parts)
6 Improve servicing (maintainability, service parts).
7 Enhance adaptability to society (compliance with laws and
regulations, standards, and criteria, environmental
preservation)
8 Response to patent issues.
9 Release drawings (issue of finished drawing/reference
drawing/ correction of clerical error, error in BOM).
10 Others,

7/9
July 1, 2014

NO Item Description
⑬ CODE No. Enter the cause code that is most appropriate (refer to the following table).
Cause code No. Reasons for Countermeasure Request
no.
1 Release of drawings for remaining items.
2 Error on drawing.
3 Error in bill of material.
4 Imperfect design (layout, interference, requirement)
5 Insufficient adjustment by test .
6 Poor communication among HG sections concerned.
7 Improvement of assemble-ability and process-ability that are
verifiable only in the mass production line (request from
production line, manufacturer, etc.).
8 Insufficient study by plant, EG or manufacturer.
(insufficient adjustment among sections in charge of actual
operation).
9 Unexpected external factor.
(Influence of other companies, top management direction,
specification change request from sales section.
10 Event.
(VA, lightweight contest, electrodeposition verification, wiring
verification, maintainability verification, noise verification, etc.)
11 Market quality information, etc.
12 Others.
⑭ Variation Cross out with a diagonal line.
⑮ Revis. no. Enter the final notice number of the part (base part) subject to
countermeasure request.
If applicable, enter the part type number provided in the “DWG No.” section
(part number or drawing number) in the drawing title block.
Drawing title block
(Example)
※Check the NAME

section in the drawing
title block (in the
boxed area).
Enter the final notice number of the revision record.

⑯ Description Describe the phenomenon (request contents) clearly and concisely.
Where possible, illustrate the phenomenon.
If data, etc., are available, attach them (detailed as much as possible).
※ Suppliers to describe Honda locations to which they deliver parts
(including overseas), because parts subject to countermeasure may be
used in multiple Honda products as part of parts.

8/9
July 1, 2014

NO Item Description
⑰ Proposed Describe proposed countermeasure against phenomenon clearly and
C/M concisely.
Where possible, illustrate the phenomenon.
If data, etc., are available, attach them (detailed as much as possible).
Regarding countermeasures, when it is necessary to coordinate verification
with the related Honda sections, a prior request is necessary. Also, when
coordination with related HG occurs, the HG representative‘s full name and
HG to which he/she belongs is filled in.
⑱ Effects of Calculates the amount if the countermeasure is applied and enters the
C/M amount.
OLD: cost before countermeasure.
New: cost after countermeasure.
Diff: difference between OLD and NEW.
⑱-a Cost difference-calculate the cost incurred by the requesting
section.
⑱-b WT difference – the requesting section calculates the difference in
weight.
⑱-c New investment – calculate the cost needed by the requesting
section.
⑱-d Loss – calculate the cost incurred in die modification, disposition,
etc. due to countermeasure.
⑱-e For Honda use only ( no entry required)
⑱-f Die modification schedule – enter schedule of die modification.
Check For Honda use only (no entry required).
Note: cross out fields that will not be affected and no entries to be made
with a diagonal line.

9/9
October 1, 2008
5 Reference
1 Overview
This manual is to provide basic concepts and points to consider for evaluating process
capability to prove that a manufacturing process has the ability to consistently achieve
intended quality levels, and for taking actions to the outcome of such evaluation.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Process The ability to achieve quality requirements of a process in a
1
capability controlled state.
A quantified measure of process capability, and “a value calculated
by dividing the specification range by 6σ for a certain
Process characteristic”
2 capability
Index ”Process in a controlled state” in the definition above for process
capability means that the characteristic value is normally distributed,
and this forms the basis of the process capability index.
One of the numeric values which correspond to the distribution of
Standard statistical values and random variables, and expressed by σ.
3
deviation 6 σ represents the value of σ (standard deviation) multiplied by six
times.
50 %
Setting up of inspection standard tolerance at 50 percent of the
4 Tolerance
tolerance specified on drawings.
limit band
3 Requirements
3.1 Concept of Process Capability
Process capability is the ability of a stable process to achieve the required quality, and
which is expressed by X±3σ representing the distribution range of dispersion of product
quality produced by a standardized process.
－
σ² = Σ（Ｘｉ－Ｘ）²
ｎ－１
－
X
σ：Standard deviation
n：Number of data
Xi：Individual data
－：Mean value of individual data
X
σ
6σ
Fig.1: Illustration of process capability

1/8
October 1, 2008
3.2 Process Capability Index.

Process capability index is expresses as Cp (an index used when the center (= average)
of the distribution of data plotted at the median between the upper and lower limits) or
Cpk (used when the mean is displaced from the center between the upper and lower
limits).
The “k” in Cpk stands for “Katarori” in Japanese language for shift or offset.
3.2.1 Process Capability Index (Cp)

Compare the deviation range 6σwith the product specification range and determine
the ability of a process to manufacture products meeting required specifications.
Cp＝ specification range / 6σ (if a single specification limit, Cp＝｜specification limit
－ mean｜/3σ).
1) If Cp ≧ 1.00, the process capability is not considered adequate, however
almost no nonconforming products will be produced.
(99.7% or more products are within the specification range): perform a thorough
process control and maintain it in a controlled state). if Cp becomes close to 1,
there will be a possibility that nonconforming products will occur, so take
appropriate actions as necessary.
2) If Cp ≧ 1.33, the process capability is considered adequate.
(99.99 % or more products are within the specification range): this is an ideal
state so maintain.
3.2.2 Process Capability Index (Cpk)
Even if Cp ≧ 1, nonconformity can occur if the mean value is displaced from the
center of the specification limits. Use Cpk process capability index for judgment,
which takes deviation into consideration.
Take appropriate action for the mean value to be the center of the specification limits
if the mean is shifted from the center.

2/8
October 1, 2008
3.3 Calculation of Process Capability Index

The followings are examples of calculation of process capability.
Relationship bet/ distribution
Classification Formula Calculation Example
and specification limits
S SU 52－49
Cp =
6×0.48
Both-sided specification limits
SU－SL
Cp Cp =
σ 6σ 3
= = 1.04
2.88
K (SU＋SL） / 2－x－ (52＋49）/ 2－50

SL SU K= K=
(SU－SL） / 2 (52－49） / 2
σ SU－SL K = 0.3333
Cpk Cpk = (1-K)
6σ 52－49
Cpk = (1-0.3333）
－ 6×0.48
X Cpk = 0.69
Median of the specification When K ≧ 1, Cpk=0.
SU －
SU－x 52－50
Cp = Cp =
3σ
Single-sided specification limits
3×0.48
σ
Upper limit
(SU) －
When x ≧ SU, Cp=0. Cp = 1.39
－
X
SL － 50－49
x－SL
Cp = Cp =
3σ 3×0.48
Lower limit σ
(SL)
－ Cp = 0.69
When x ≦ SL, Cp=0.
－
X
〔e.g.〕Mean: －ｘ＝50 Standard deviation: σ＝1-48

Upper limit: SU=52 Lower limit : SL＝49
〔note〕K : degree of katayori or deviation I I: absolute value
Formula for K
SL SU
( median － mean)
K=
－ (range of the upper and lower
Median X
specification limits/2)
Lower limit
Upper limit
(SU＋SL） / 2－x－
=
(SU－SL） / 2
－
 When K ＞ 1, X is outside the upper or lower
limit.
a －
 When the median value equals to X, K = 0.
b

3/8
October 1, 2008
【Bad example of the mean】
SL Median of － SU Although distribution range is

specification X
within product specification
limits, the mean value is
shifted and a deviation is
Lower limit
Upper limit
generated.
The degree of deviation is
large and nonconformity may
possibly occur.
shift If Cpk＝NG, even if Cp＝OK,

nonconformity my not be
contained and dispatched to
the market.
【Bad example of distribution】
SL SU
－
X
Although the mean is in the
center of the product
Lower limit
Upper limit
specification limits, the
distribution range is largely
exceeding the upper and
lower limits.
Nonconformity is very likely
to occur.
3σ

4/8
October 1, 2008
3.4 Process Capability Judgment and Measures

Following examples demonstrate the determination process capabilities by the process
capability based on the process capability index and subsequent responses.
Relationship bet. Estimated
distribution & Cpk Judgment Measures percent
specifications defective
SL SU Inspection method:
100 % inspection or
Process sampling inspection.
capability Slight increase in product 0.06/
σ Cpk ≧ 1.67 is more dispersion is of no 100000
than concern units or
sufficient. Consider simplification of less
control, reduction of costs,
－ etc.
X
SL SU
0.06
Inspection method:
Process /100000
1.67 ＞ Cpk 100% inspection or
σ capability to
sampling inspection.
≧ 1.33 is 6.3
sufficient. This is the ideal state, so it
is maintained. /100000
units
－
X
Inspection method:
Sampling tests are
completed and no
SL SU nonconformity is found, or
σ a procedure is employed 6.3
to take retroactive action /100000
Process for the possible
1.33 ＞ Cpk capability to
nonconforming product lot
≧ 1.00 is not before dispatching from 2.6
sufficient. the supplier. /1000
Process improvement is units
－
X required until a Cpk of
1.33 is achieved.
Maintain the process in a
controlled state.
SL SU
Inspection method:
determine whether or not 2.6/
σ 1,000
Process the lack of process
1.00 ＞ Cpk capability capability is due to a to
≧ 0.67 is displacement of the 45.6/
insufficient. median or dispersion. 1000
Investigate and take units
－ measures.
X

5/8
October 1, 2008
3.5 Key Points for process capability

3.5.1 Correct sampling: points to estimate the characteristics of the general population
are as follows.
1) Random sampling = do not use data collected only under the same conditions.
2) Measurement accuracy= calculate to one more decimal place than the
specification value.
3) Avoidance of factors causing problems = obtain data from the condition in which
problem factors do not exist.
4) Clarify the definition of the lot and comprehend lot-to-lot dispersion. Check at
least 3 lots and determine the acceptance by increasing n.
3.5.2 Interpretation and Judgment of Data
3.5.2.1 Confirm data distribution and its shape (on a normal distribution)
If multiple tooling are used, verify data for each die or mold. For fabrication
method previously employed, comparison with actual performance may also be
effective to check the degree of dispersion and median.
If it is not a normal distribution, change variables.
3.5.2.2 Check dispersion from the median with Cpk.
3.5.2.3 Use sufficient quantity of n. If n is small, it is important to take into account
that the reliability of data may be reduced when making the judgment (increase
or adjust the number of n, if it is very close to 1.33).
3.5.3 Condition Setting with Allowance

When determining process capability based on data analysis, judgment shall be
made taking into consideration the preceding sections 3.5.2.1 and 3.5.2.2. Where
conditions affecting results are under control, it can be said that a process has an
acceptable process capability if manufacturing output is confirmed to be within the
specification range even if conditions are slightly deviate from the upper and lower
limits.
Condition setting with appropriate allowance backed by data is important.
Failure mode Control range Failure mode

case depth, carburized depth, rivet diameter
Manufacturing
condition
Control range
Current value, temperature, time, application quantity
Control item

6/8
October 1, 2008
3.6 Evaluation at the Production Preparation Stage

3.6.1 Concept of 50 Percent Tolerance Band
At pre-production stage in which n is limited, in order to assure process capability
during mass production by such small size of n, the population shall be aimed to
come closer to the center of the specification limits.
If deviations close to the upper and/or lower limit are found in the evaluation of
measurements with such small n, it is more likely for deviations to go beyond the
specification at mass production stage. In such cases, die/mold change, etc. will
become necessary during mass production.
When ensuring initial quality as part of production preparation activities, evaluate
dispersion in the specification range set at 50 percent of the specification limits
shown on drawings.
50% Tolerance Band
Tolerance on the drawing
Evaluation range
50% of tolerance 50% of tolerance

specified on specified on
drawing drawing
●
It may deviate ● ●
from specifications
at mass production ●
● ●
●
stage. ● ●
●
Mean
3.6.2 Judgment Criteria

All measured values shall be within one half of the tolerance given on the drawing.
This may not be mandatory if it is proved that the specifications will be satisfied for
mass production.
Note: the requirements above are in effect for pre-production stage where n is
insufficient. In mass production stage, process capability shall be evaluated with Cpk
based on n of sufficient size, and necessary improvement actions shall be taken
accordingly.
It is intended for the mean to be closer to the center of specification limits in the early
stage of production. Reduction of tolerance itself shall not be the purpose of
employing the 50 percent tolerance band. As long as the original drawing tolerance
is met, products beyond the 50 percent tolerance shall be considered conforming.
3.6.3 Measures Against Out-Of-Specification
3.6.3.1 When employing judgment criteria set forth in the preceding section 3.6.2
and if deviations out of the tolerance range (50 percent of tolerance on drawing)
are found, continue on measuring in mass production, and determine the
process capability(Cpk) based on data with n=100 or more.
3.6.3.2 Criteria for judging process capability using data size n=100 or more and
subsequent measures shall be in accordance with section 3.4.
1 Records of process capability study 5 years after study

7/8
October 1, 2008
6 Operation flow
Determine product specifications Note ： quality is built

(drawings, specifications included ) into a product through
a process.
Process can achieve
optimum performance
Clarify important quality characteristics of parts. only under a controlled
state.
Set process parameters for part characteristics to control.
Make the process to be in a controlled state.
Calculate Cpk
Process is not in a
Perform corrective controlled state
Supplier
adjustments to stabilize
judgment
process
Process is in a controlled state
Determine the frequency of part inspection during mass production (100 %

inspection or sampling inspection to be carried our depending on the calculated
Cpk). During mass production, maintain consistent process capability (Cpk)
(record requirements in the process quality control table)
Requirements
Perform corrective
not met
Supplier
adjustments of process judgment
Requirements met
Continue to strive for
minimizing variations
Deliver parts to Honda
in manufacturing

8/8
5-2 Error Proofing
October 1, 2008
5-2 Error Proofing
1 Overview
This manual is to provide points to consider when employing error proofing methods to detect
abnormalities in manufacturing and inspection processes and to prevent outflow of
nonconformity.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Error A system of products or manufacturing processes that prevents
1
proofing nonconforming products from being manufactured.
3 Requirements
3.1 Concept of Error Proofing
Basic concepts of error proofing are as follows.
3.1.1 Prevention: an action to focus on processes in which operational errors causing
accidents or quality troubles occur, and take action to prevent such errors from
occurring.
Three tips are show below for prevention of operation errors.
1) Eliminate factors causing additional work or constraining operations, and render
such work or caution unnecessary.
2) Replace manual operations with other more assured methods (i.e. employ
machines and/or equipment).
3) Design operations to be easy for operators to perform.
3.1.2 Mitigation of errors: focus attention on diffusion process of error effects, and take
action to contain nonconformity resulted from errors.
Two tips are provided below, which are to avoid spillover effects of operation errors.
1) Employ measures to preclude subsequent processes from proceeding
operations until the cause of error is removed or corrected.
2) In order to minimize effects to products when operation error occurs, provide
shock-absorbing dunnage, protectors, etc., or arrange operation sequences into
parallel.
3.2 Scope of Error Proofing
The scope of error proofing shall include the following processes or operations. Request
a specification change where employing error proofing safeguards into product
specifications for misassembly or reverse assembly of parts.
If product specification is subject to error proofing, request a specification change.
3.2.1 Process or operation to which occurrence or outflow of a market quality problem is
attributed.
3.2.2 Process or operation which is deemed necessary with consideration of the
following items along with the result of a process FMEA (refer to 【SQM 5-5 Process
FMEA】) conducted by the supplier.
1) Possibility of occurrence: frequency of occurrence per error mode
2) Degree of criticalness: degree of severity per error mode
3) Degree of spreading prevention: degree of detection per error mode
4) Process or operation for which application of error proofing is directed by
Honda.

1/2
5-2 Error Proofing
October 1, 2008
3.3 Type and Method of Error Proofing

After determining the scope of error proofing application, in accordance with section 3.1”
Concept of Error Proofing”, examine error proofing methods suitable to the process or
operation concerned.
Concrete examples of error proofing are as follows.
1) If operation error occurs, parts will not be mounted on jigs.
2) Machine will not start if an operation error or a problem with parts exists.
3) Correct dispersion in operations or equipment automatically, while proceeding with
work.
4) Subsequent process verifies operation results of a preceding process and detect
problems.
5) Identify parts, jigs, etc., by color, size and shape to distinguish.
6) Automate work operations.
7) Take measures against parts fall including shock absorption when dropped.
3.4 Verification of Error Proofing
Prior to applying error proofing to a process or operation, confirm the following functions,
etc. and verify effectiveness of the error proofing.
1) Capability of detecting operation errors, problems with parts, etc.
2) Detection capability of difference in parts location and/or arrangement.
3) Functions to prevent easy change and unwanted operation of the equipment.
4) Possibility of the error proofing function to damage parts.
3.5 Effectiveness Evaluation

If error proofing is applied to a process or operation, assess the effectiveness of the error
proofing on a regular basis.
The assessment shall be made based on information and data obtained from results of
error proofing techniques as in the following examples.
1) Ratio of problem products detected.
2) Quantity and details of problem products that were not detected and flowed out into
subsequent process.
3) Operating ratio and failure ratio of error proofing.
4) Increase or decrease in costs, labor, etc. for error proofing.
3.6 Feedback from Error Proofing
Following information with regard to problems detected by error proofing shall be
provided to the responsible party and shall be utilized for problem containment and root
cause elimination.
1) Problem parts detected by error proofing.
2) Quantity and details of detected problem products.
3) Corrective action taken against the problem detected.
4) Specification change request (countermeasure request form, etc.)

2/2
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
5-3 Control Chart
1 Overview
This manual is to explain the concept of control chart and provide entry method to record data
into the chart. Control chart shall be used to continually improve the quality of products and
the effectiveness of quality management systems.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Variable Data obtained by measurement. Unit of measure can be made precise
1 (continuous depending on the measuring device.
data)
Discrete Data obtained by counting and it cannot be divided into units smaller
2
value than one.
Group or grouping is the act of collection of data into units. In general, a
group is a set of data collected through random sampling per unit such
3 Group as day, shit or batch, etc.
* batch: a set of material (conditions) processed in a single production
process.
3 Requirements
Concept of Control Chart：
Manufacturing process fluctuates and is affected by various factors. A control chart is a visual
technique used to visualize the control state of a manufacturing process, where data shows
temporal changes in certain quality characteristic. It is assumed that a considerable error
exists when control chart shows deviations of characteristics from a predetermined control
limit value.
3.1 Control Chart
Control chart is a chart (line chart with control limits identified) used to investigate
(process analysis) or monitor (process control) stability of a manufacturing process that
determines with quality characteristics.
Control chart shall be used not to discover nonconformities but to prevent problems from
occurring. (This is on the basis that specification limits are outside the control limits.)
3.2 Types and Choices of Control Charts
There are various types of control charts, while all are fundamentally similar.
Appropriate chart shall be selected for each purpose based on the subject matter of
control.
Selection of control chart depends on the type of data used, i.e. continuous or discrete
data.

1/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
Type of data Type and outline of control charts

A representative control chart for continuous data
＿ process control and it displays the maximum and
Length minimum difference values (R) between the mean
X – R chart
Weight (X bar R and the data. Usually analysis is done using a set of
Time chart) control charts as pair of which one is for control of
data distribution and the other is for control of
deviations. This is the most widely used control chart.
An alternative to the X bar and R chart and used to
～ control processes from which measurement
～ data will
Strength X – R chart be obtained. A control chart using X (median: the
Variable Constituent (X median central value in a distribution)
～ rather than X bar and
(continuous Yield displays middle value (X) and range (R). The median
R chart)
data) of a set of data arranged in order of increasing or
decreasing magnitude is expressed by X.
The X control chart is a control chart which plots a set
of data points for each calculated value. It allows
immediate plotting of dada where grouping of data is
Purity
not practical or where data is obtained one by one
Filled content, X chart
over a certain period of time due to batch production.
etc.
This X chart has the characteristics that it does not
～
cause a delay in time from the point of obtaining data
to judgment and response to process conditions.
The p chart is used to calculate the mean percent
defective in a certain period of time. The percent
Percent defective p chart
defective awakens operators or management
personnel to the changes in the rate.
The np chart is used when the number of defects in
the sample is expressed by np and when n, which is
used to express the number of products generally
Number of contained in the sample, is a fixed number.
np chart
defects
The np-chart is a control chart used to study mainly
Discrete the problem rate and number of defects as the p
value chart.
A control chart which is used where sample size of
data (area, length, etc.) is fixed to control processes
Number of
c chart by using values from the discrete data such as the
problems
number of problems, problem points, accidents, and
repair, etc.
A control chart which is used to control processes by
Number of using data from the discrete data as with the c chart.
u chart
problems per unit The U chart is used where the sample size of data is
not fixed.

2/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.3 Representative Control Charts

3.3.1 X – R chart
X – R chart is mainly used to monitor changes in mean values (between-group
variation: dispersion between groups), and R- charts is to monitor changes in the
dispersion of values (within-group variation: dispersion within a group). X-chart and
R-chart are frequently used in combination.
－
X－R chart
x Defect
Specification
limit
Control limit problem ★
(UCL）
Take action here
(CL)
Control limit
(LCL） Specification limit
3.3.2 Preparation of X – R chart

3.3.2.1 Collection of Data
Collect as much data as possible about the characteristics which provide
important information of the process. Ensure that collected data is
comparatively new, is applicable to the process in the future, and have a clear
record.
3.3.2.2 Grouping
Group data based on data history, and sort by lot sequence and sampling
measurement sequence etc.. The number of data in one group (the sample
size) is generally expressed by n, and the number of groups, by k.
3.3.2.3 Datasheet
Create a datasheet with consideration of section 3.3.2.1 and 3.3.2.2. and enter
data. Examples of datasheets are provided in section 7. No specific style of form
is designated.
3.3.2.4 Calculation of Mean Value
Calculate the mean, round to one more decimal place that the measured value.
Find the mean value ( X ) per group.
X1＋X2＋X3＋……Xn
X=
n
3.3.2.5 Calculation of Range

Find the range (R) per group.
R is used to indicate dispersion within a group and is a difference between the
maximum and the minimum values within a group.
R＝X max－X min

3/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.3.2.6 Calculation of Grand Mean ( X ).

Add X of all groups and divide by the number of groups, K.
X1＋X2＋X3＋……Xk
X=
k
Calculate the mean to two more decimal places than the measured value.
(Do not round off since it will be used in later calculations.)
3.3.2.7 Calculation of Range Mean Value
Add all the R values of each group and divide by k
R1＋R2＋R3＋……Rk
R=
k
Calculate the mean to one more decimal place than the measured value.
(Do not round off since it will be used in later calculations.)
3.3.2.8 Calculation of Control Limits
X control chart Control limit line coefficient
Centerline : CL＝ X n A2 D4
Upper control limit line : UCL＝ X ＋A2R 2 1.880 3.267
Lower control limit line : LCL＝ X －A2R 3 1.023 2.575
4 0.729 2.282
R chart
5 0.577 2.115
Centerline : CL＝ R
Upper control limit line : UCL＝D4R
Lower control limit line : LCL＝ignored when n is equal to or smaller than 6.
3.3.2.9 Entry of Control Lines

Set scale on the control chart so that the spacing between the upper and lower
control lines will be about 20 to 30 mm and enter CL, UCL and LCL on the chart.
Draw center line (CL) by solid line and draw limit lines by broken lines in the
case of data analysis or dashed-dotted lines in the case of process control.
Centerline : solid line ( )

Limit analysis : broken line ( )
line process control : dashed-dotted line ( )
In case the control chart for analysis is extended for application to process
control, the line is changed from broken line to dashed-dotted line. Also enter CL,
UCL, LCL and each value near the lines.
3.3.2.10 Plotting
For plotting normally, “●” is used for X and “x” is used for R. Plots outside of the
control limits (including those on the limits) should be so marked as to facilitate
identification. (e.g. ”◎” or in red, etc.).

4/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.3.2.11 Points to Remember

In general, set control limits based on the dispersion of data when preparing a
control chart.
In some cases control limits are set at the upper specification limit and the lower
specification limit with an optimistic view of no nonconformance being expected.
However if control limits are set at the specification limits, the chart will not allow
detection of possible abnormality and it is a misuse of the chart.
Count the dispersion of data in setting control limits (action lines) on a chart
when using specification limit. Use the chart to prevent problems from occurring
by taking precautions when dispersion is observed in the red zone.
3.3.3 p Chart
P chart does not require a fixed sample size. P chart is used in control of the process
in which percent defective can be expressed in percentage. For instance, when
finished- or semi-finished goods of 100 sheets, 100 units or n in general are
inspected for quality, 5 (r or np in general) out of 100 of products are found to be
non-conforming, therefore the percent defective P is 5/100, .05 or 5%. The percent
non defective may also be used.
3.3.4 Preparation of p control chart

3.3.4.1 Data Collection
Collect data of inspection results with number of units inspected (n) and number
of units rejected (np). Minimum of 20 sets of data shall be collected.
Data shall be collected and recorded with respect to each lot, machine, date,
time, etc.
3.3.4.2 Grouping
Form a group with the collected data. The size of a group n should not be too
large or too small since groups with many p=0 points are not appropriate.
3.3.4.3 Determination of Percent defective
Fill in a datasheet with the group number, n, np, etc., and calculate a percent
defective for each group (p).
no. of rejects np
p＝＝
size of a group n
Multiply by 100 for percentage.
3.3.4.4 Determination of Average Percent defective
－ total of rejects Σnp

p= ＝
total of units inspected Σn
（note that this is not the mean value of the percent defective p of each group）
3.3.4.5 Calculation and Entry of Control Limits.
Centerline ：CL＝p
－－
－ 3 √ p ( 1－p ）
Upper control line：UCL＝ p＋
n
－－
－ 3 √ p ( 1－p ）
Lower control line：LCL＝ p－
n

5/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.3.4.6 Control Chart Preparation

3.3.4.7 Points to Remember
If the sample size n varies among groups, center line will remain the same, but
control limits shall be calculated for each group and a limit value be applied for
each point.
Thus, limit lines on the control chart may be uneven, and control range becomes
smaller as n becomes larger. If n is larger than 500, use a stratification approach
since the control range becomes exceptionally small.
3.4 Reading of Control Charts
In order to understand the condition of processes i.e., acceptable, marginal or critical, it is
necessary to read trends in data points appeared on control chart. The purpose is to take
actions proactively when abnormality is observed in control chart.
3.4.1 The criteria for judging process conditions, whether or not a process is in a
controlled state (or stable state), are as follows.
It is advisable that evaluations be made on the basis of at least 25 plotted points.
3.4.1.1 No plotted points outside control limits; no out-of-control points.
However a process is considered as being in a controlled state if the
following cases apply.
when 25 consecutive points are within the limits.
One point or less out of 35 consecutive points lies outside the limits.
(And, this one point exhibits no particular abnormality.)
1) Two points or less out of 100 consecutive points lie outside the limits.
(and, these two points exhibit no particular abnormality.)
2) No bias in sequence, trends, cycles, etc. in the order of plotted points.
3.4.2 Data Point Exceeds Control limits

Circle the point
out of control ● Control limit
●
● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
●
Control limit
out of control
The points outside control limit lines are referred to as being “control-out” or “out of
control”. Reasons for points being control-out are as follows.
(1) Due to a random cause resulting in the point lies outside the limit lines, or
(2) An abnormality has occurred in the process and resulted in the point being
outside the control limit lines.
Phenomenon described in (1) above may occur with a probability of three times in
1000 plots. If control-out occurs, take action on the premise that 2) above is most
likely to have occurred and probe the cause of abnormality.

6/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.4.3 Run of Data Points
control limit
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● circle the plotted points
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
●
control limit
A series of points appear consecutively on one side of the centerline (median line, to
be precise, may be substituted by the centerline) is called a run. The length of a run
is the number of consecutive points to one side of the centerline.
A run with seven or more points is judged as indicating control-out state.
3.4.4 Data points show a cycle
control limit
●
● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
● ●
● ● ● ●
control limit
When data points show a cyclic pattern of always declines on Mondays, there must
be a reason.
Investigation into the cause of cycles peculiar to the process is very useful in terms
of process analysis. Although these cycles are not easy to identify, it is ideal to
analyze them with experiences and engineering knowledge over a long period of
time and develop control methods well matched to the rhythm (cycle).
It is necessary to discern the cause of the cycle and carefully evaluate the process
condition to determine whether or not a process is in a controlled state.
3.4.5 Shows Trends (Upward or Downward)
control limit
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●●
● ●
●
● ● ● ●
control limit
If there is an upward or downward run of consecutive seven points or more, it is also

judged as out of control. In case of a steep rising or falling, take immediate action to
investigate the cause when any obvious trends in the plot of data is observed.

7/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.4.6 Two Spikes on Chart
control limit
● ● ● ●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●
●
● ●
control limit
It is also considered abnormal if there are two spikes appear in the plot of raw data.
There may be a mix up of data of two or more.
(e.g.) two spikes have different patterns, etc.
3.4.7 All Points Gathered Around the Centerline
control limit
●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
control limit
If the process is in a controlled state, the plotted points must be distributed randomly.
When considering distribution confirmed by control limit lines at ±3σ, the slope down
gradually becomes lower from the center to the edges so that points are less likely to
occur about the center line when they get close to the control limits Compared to the
vicinity of the centerline, points appear less readily as the control limits are
approached. In other words, points should not occur concentrated about the center
line.
It is often the case that there is either a problem with the grouping, or groups contain
abnormal data.
It is also judged abnormal if 15 or more consecutive points fall between ±σ.
(e.g.) measurement error
3.4.8 Consecutive Points on One Side of the Centerline.
control limit
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
●
● ●
●
control limit
10 out of 11 consecutive points are on one side of CL.
If one of the following conditions appear on one side of the centerline (median line to
be precise), the process is judged as out of control controlled state.
1) 10 or more points out of 11 consecutive points
2) 12 or more point out of 14 consecutive points
3) 14 or more point out of 17 consecutive points, or
4) 16 or more point out of 20 consecutive points.

8/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
3.4.9 Few Points Along the Centerline
●
control limit
● ● ● ● ● ●
●
● ●
●
●
● ● ● ●
● ●● ● ●
control limit
Under normal circumstances, a large number of points should be near the centerline
if the sample follows a single normal distribution. Accordingly, the chart above shows
an abnormality.
This is often found when plotting data on the chart with sample groups taken from
each of two machines with different process average. It is necessary to stratify the
sample groups and draw control chart for each machine.
3.4.10 Points Close to the Control Limit Lines.
● ● ● control limit
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
●
● ●
● ● ●
control limit
Evaluate as control-out in the following cases when points are near the control limit
lines, beyond the line two third of the distance from the center line to the control limit
lines.
1) 2 out of 3 consecutive points
The above conditions shall be judged abnormal since probability of the process
being beyond ±2σ range from the centerline is approximately 5 percent.
1 X – R control chart 5 years after creation

2 p control chart 5 years after creation

9/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
6 Operation flowchart
Process output
　　・Collect samples to form 25 groups of

Evaluate w/ control 　　 size 4 or 5.
　　・Calculate the center line and
chart 　　 control limit lines.
　　・Plot and check data on a control chart.
　・Identifiable cause 　　　　・Plotted points are
exists. 　　　　 randomly dispersed
　・Data points are outside Process not in a 　　　　 from the centerline.
Process in a statistically
　　 the control limits. statistically controlled controlles state. 　　　　・Points are inside the CL
　・Run, trend, cycle, etc. 　　　　・No run, trend, or cycle.
exist. 　　　　・Process is stable and
　　　　predictable.
Eliminate identifiable Evaluate process

　　　　・Estimate σ
causes capability 　　　　・Find Cpk
Cpk<1 1≦Cpk<1.33 Cpk≧1.33
Need improvement Study if improvement is Maintain status

100 % inspetion necessary / Sampling quo (monitoring)
inspection
Make improvement

10/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
7 Examples of Forms
7-1 X – R control chart
Approved by Confirmed by Prep. by
Notes for entry

1. Enter X and R values in solid lines. 〔Ｘ－Ｒ Chart 〕
2. Enter UCL and LCL in dotted lines. Measurement period: from 　　yy/mm/dd to 　yy/mm/dd.
Measured date Ｘ＝Ｘ total / no. of samples sets

Ｎｏ.
Lot ＝ ÷
Size
Ｘ1
Measurements
＝
Ｘ2
Ｒ＝Ｒ total / no. of samples sets
Ｘ3 ＝ ÷
Ｘ4
＝
Ｘ5
Total
Ｘ chart
Mean Ｘ
ＵＣＬ＝Ｘ＋Ａ2Ｒ
Range Ｒ
Unit ＝＋
（　　）
×
Ｘ　Chart
＝
ＬＣＬ＝Ｘ－Ａ2Ｒ
＝－
＝
Ｒ Chart
Ｒ chat
ＵＣＬ＝Ｄ4Ｒ
＝ ×
＝
Confirmation ＬＣＬ＝Ｄ3Ｒ
Disregard samples
of 6 or less.
Control limit line coefficient

Notes
ｎ A2 D4
２ 1.88 3.27
Supplier or process zone Part number Part name Quality characteristics Standard Sampling frequency Measuring equipment ３ 1.02 2.57
４ 0.73 2.28
５ 0.58 2.11
Original to be retained until 　 YY/MM/DD

11/12
5-3 Control Chart
February 1, 2013
7-2 P control Chart

Part Name Part Name
　　　　　－　　　　　　－　　　　　　　〔 P Chart 〕 Date: 　　　　　 YY/MM/DD
（％）
Description
Date
Item No. Total
of units
Number processed
Number of defective units

Defect rate　（％）
Notes
Be sure to provide the following
information.
1. Causes and measures taken if points
had been found lying outside the control
limits.
2. Specify changes if there is a change to
the contents of a control chart.
3. Any changes to operation standards, or
to other major items which require changes
Original to be retained until 　 YY/MM/DD

12/12
October 1, 2008
1 Overview
This manual is to provide the concept of “5 Principles for Problem Solving”, which is used by
suppliers to investigate and eliminate the root cause of nonconformity of parts and of quality
management system.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
A condition characterized by discrepancy between an ideal state
1 Problem
and an actual state.
A tool consists of the following five steps for problem solving.
Also referred to as 5P.
“ investigation and comprehension of the facts”
5 Principals for Problem “ identification of causes (why-why analysis) ”
2
Solving
“ appropriate measures”
“ verification of the effects of measures”
“ feedback to upstream sources”
3 Requirements
3.1 The concept of “5 Principals for Problem Solving”.
It is important, for the purpose of quality control, to never repeat the same problem. When
a problem occurs, thoroughly observe and understand the facts on the basis of the Three
Realities Principle of spot, thing, situation, and take appropriate measures to prevent
problem recurrence.
A thorough analysis of root causes is essential for effective measures to prevent problem
recurrence.
Implement 5 Principles for Problem Solving to identify the root causes and eliminate
causes of nonconformity.
3.2 Steps for 5 Principals for Problem Solving

3.2.1 Fact Findings and Situation Assessment
3.2.1.1 Begin investigation immediately to avoid impediments in the following.
1) Spot, thing, and situation change by the minute.
2) Memories of personnel concerned begin to fade.
3.2.1.2 Review the facts by 5W2H and study factual information in detail. Obtain
additional information on nonconformity if necessary.
1) Who
2) What
3) When
4) Where
5) Why
6) How
7) How many/How much
3.2.1.3 Classify information into process and actual problem part and analyze.
Perform analysis of actual problem parts based on the following information.
1) Information on nonconformity (information on symptom, situation and
environment of problem occurrence)
2) Appearance of nonconforming parts (visual check)

1/5
October 1, 2008
3) Comparison of dimensions with drawing specifications.

4) Test result
5) Reproducibility analysis
6) Date of manufacture, identification mark, lot number
Perform analysis of processes based on the following information.
1) Work shift, operators, etc. when problem occurred.
2) Presence of abnormality in operation and/or equipment when problem
occurred.
3) Adequacy of listing in the process quality control table and operation
standard, etc.
4) Quality records (daily report, inspection record, control chart, problem
summary, etc.)
5) Nonconformity and repair history.
3.2.1.4 Classify information into the following categories based on the results of
analysis, and identify the primary cause of the nonconformity.
1) Machine
2) Material
3) Manpower
4) Method
5) Others
3.2.2 Identifying causes (why-why analysis )

3.2.2.1 For each symptom, classify causes into occurrence, outflow, and expansion
(by cause) and conduct analysis in aspects of both hardware side and software
side.
3.2.2.2 Repeatedly ask “why” as many times as necessary and analyze until the root
cause is identified.
3.2.2.3 Benefit of performing why-why analysis
1) Level of problem can be clearly defined and communicated.
2) Relationship between multiple causes is easily understood.
3) Multiple causes can be identified.
4) Factors that can not be the cause can be identified along with the reasons.
5) Investigation process of causes is traceable
6) Differences between individuals can be eliminated. Attention can be
focused on the problem itself, not the history of the problem.
7) Attention can be focused on causes, not symptoms.
8) Support systems for problem solving can be established by gaining consent
from related sections and persons, etc.
3.2.2.4 Conduct why-why analysis involving as many persons concerned as
possible. A cause for which all participants come to the same conclusion is
most likely to be the root cause.
3.2.2.5 Verify adequacy of why-why analysis flow in view of the following points.
1) Same or similar factors not repeatedly appeared?
2) Flow of why-why analysis not being reversed?
3) No conflict in the story from the occurrence of a problem to discovery of the
root cause (no deviation from story).
3.2.3 Appropriate measures
3.2.3.1 Determine measures deemed most effective for identified root cause.
3.2.3.2 Examine measures, whenever possible, in aspects of both hardware side
and software side.
3.2.3.3 Measures shall be appropriate not only for the process or operation
concerned but also for the organization in totality.

2/5
October 1, 2008
3.2.3.4 Implement measures focusing more on the elimination of cause, rather than
prevention of outflows
3.2.3.5 Measures shall be employed on a permanent basis (elimination of causes).
If judged necessary based on the degree of severity, urgency, and negative
effects, etc., take interim measures (containment of nonconforming products).
Timing to implement permanent measures shall be defined in advance when
interim measures are taken.
3.2.4 Verification of Effectiveness of Measures
3.2.4.1 Verify effectiveness of measures with reasonable number of units or time
period, and confirm no recurrence of problems from the same cause.
3.2.4.2 Verify both products and processes.
(e.g.) Product: disassemble completed products for verification, if necessary.
Process: verify the process in which problems were found.
3.2.4.3 Effectiveness shall be verified per shift, operator, etc., depending on the
cause of problems or the nature of measures.
3.2.4.4 Verify that the results of measures will not have any adverse effect on other
products, processes, operations, etc.
3.2.5 Feedback to Upstream Sources
3.2.5.1 Revise the following standards and reflect the results of measures.
1) Manufacturing quality standard
2) Process quality control table
3) Operation standard
4) Others
3.2.5.2 Share information with related organizations and sections to prevent
nonconformity from occurring in similar operations, processes or systems.
1) Sections/areas in which similar operations, processes, or systems are
used.
2) Section found the nonconformity.
3) Section responsible for designing processes.
4) Section responsible for designing products
5) Section responsible for controlling quality system documents.

3/5
October 1, 2008
3.3 Why-why Analysis Method
Start from the problem symptom. Sort out and

systematize relevant factors until the root cause is Root Cause/Task
revealed. 5th “Why” 1-1-1-1-1 A
4th “Why” Why does 1-1-1-1 occur ?
1-1-1-1 1-1-1-1-2
3rd “Why” 1-1-1 Why does 1-1-1 occur ? B
1-1-1-2 1-1-1-2-1
2nd “Why” 1-1 Why does 1-1 occur ? Why does 1-1-1-2 occur ? C
【Tangible cause 】 1-1-2-1 1-1-2-2-1
1st “Why” 1-1-2 Why does 1-1-2 occur ? Why does 1-1-2-2 occur ?
D
1 1-1-2-2 1-1-2-2-2
【Cause of Occurrence】
Problem Status / Symptom
問 1-2-1-1 1-2-1-1-1 E
題 1-2 1-2-1 Why does 1-2-1 occur ? Why does 1-2-1-1 occur ?
の【Intangible cause】 Why does 1-2 occur ? 1-2-1-2 1-2-1-2-1
現 F
Why does 1-2-1-2 occur ?
状
（
2-1-1-1 2-1-1-1-1
2-1-1 G
事
象 2-1 2-1-1-2 2-1-1-2-1
）
H
2 2-1-2 2-1-2-1 2-2-1-1-1
～【Cause of Outflow】
～ 2-2 2-2-1 2-2-1-1 2-2-1-1-2 I
～
～
～
～
3 3-1
【Cause of Expansion】
～
～
～
～
3-2

4/5
October 1, 2008
4 Key point
1) Identification of root causes is the key to the why-why analysis. In order to take adequate
measures, it is crucial to properly determine root causes. Avoid the common error of
attributing problem causes to humans, which results only in emphasizing importance of
better guidance and instruction. In such cases, the root cause remains uneliminated, and
the same problem is likely to recur.
2) If root causes are in manufacturing processes, it can often be solved by own section but
further check will reveal that modification of manufacturing method or specifications
contributes to quality stabilization. Thus, discuss with related sections for possible
improvement.

5/5
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
5-5 Process FMEA

1 Overview
This manual explains the concept of and procedures for Process FMEA, and provides and
provides entry method for the Process Design FMEA worksheet.
2 Definitions
No. Term Definition
Process FMEA
1 A format used to implement process FMEA and to record results.
worksheet
3 Requirements
3.1 Process FMEA
The process FMEA is an approach for process improvement used to investigate potential
failures and apply appropriate measures to prevent and contain these failures.
Process FMEA shall be properly documented and always maintained as a “living
document”, which is continuously revised to reflect changes in manufacturing processes.
In the manufacturing process design stage, prevention of problems from occurring or
recurring is achieved by process design base on consideration of various factors such as
quality, delivery timing, cost, safety, environment, etc., on the other hand, Process FMEA
is to determine whether a process is adequately controlled or in need of improvement by
reviewing the results of a process design (process quality control table).
Suppliers shall initiate process FMEA from the manufacturing design stage of parts.
Implement or review process FMEA in case where changes are made to parts,
manufacturing processes or environment even in the mass production stage.
3.2 Process FMEA worksheet
The supplier may implement process FMEA by entering required information into
respective fields of the Process FMEA worksheet. Completed Process FMEA worksheet
is also an implementation record of Process FMEA.
The supplier shall complete a Process FMEA worksheet, revise as necessary for
changes in processes, and control in a manner that it can be submitted or presented
upon request from Honda.
The Honda- recommended format is provided in the end section of this manual. Suppliers
may use different format on condition that all information required on the Honda form is
included.
3.3 Procedure for Process FMEA Implementation and Worksheet Entry
The following explains the items inscribed in Honda’s Process FMEA worksheet. Refer to
instructions for required information and remarks for entry. Each item number below
corresponds to the number of fields in the entry method form.
3.3.1 Process FMEA Control Number
Identify each Process FMEA by use of numbers, symbols, etc. to ensure traceability.
3.3.2 Model
Enter Model Name, Type and Model Year.
3.3.3 Honda Part Name and Part Number
Enter part name and part number of Honda subject to process FMEA. If the supplier
uses its own part name and part number, such name and number may be listed
along with the ones of Honda.
3.3.4 Suppler Name, Supplier Code and Address
Enter supplier name, supplier code, and location of the plant where the process is
operated for the purpose of Honda to identify the subject supplier.

1/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
3.3.5 Issue Date and Revision Date

Enter the date of issue or revision of the process FMEA worksheet.
Process FMEA shall be initiated in the manufacturing process design stage and
continuously maintained through the mass production stage. Revise the process
FMEA worksheet as necessary and reflect changes in the condition of relevant
processes.
3.3.6 Preparation, Review and Approval
Columns to enter signature of the supplier’s personnel who prepared ( made entries
in the worksheet), reviewed, and approved the process FMEA worksheet.
Besides the person who prepared the worksheet, the person who is responsible for
reviewing and approving the Process FMEA shall sign. The person assigned for
review and approval of the worksheet may also double as the person in charge of
Process FMEA implementation set forth in section 3.3.8.
3.3.7 Column for Honda Use Only
Where applicable, Honda uses the column for signature of the person from Honda
who reviewed or approved the process FMEA.
3.3.8 Engineer
Enter the name and section of the person who is in charge of the Process FMEA and
who implements the Process FMEA.
Efficacy of Process FMEA relies on the comprehension of the subject process.
During the development of Process FMEA, involve representatives of all affected
areas such as design, manufacturing, inspection, quality, etc. and collect as much
knowledge as possible. List all persons participated in the development of the
Process FMEA in the Engineer field.
3.3.9 Process Name and Process Number.
Enter the name and number of the process being analyzed. Identify in a manner that
links Process FEMA to the relevant process quality control charts and operation
standards.
If a process is composed of multiple work elements, break the process into as small
as possible. List each work element separately and examine failure mode.
3.3.10 Process Function
Describe the process being analyzed (what is done and how it is done). Associated
component parts and operations may also be included for better description of the
purpose of the process.
3.3.11 Failure Mode
Describe a failure mode (problem symptom) that might occur in the process.
Identify all possible failure modes that could occur in the manufacturing process and
enter as failure modes, such as problems experienced in the past or risks entailed in
new technologies, functions, etc. Because inspection processes in manufacturing
settings are also subject to Process FMEA, in addition to failures by operation and
machining processes, inspection failures shall be included.
Add to the list whenever a new failure mode is specified.
3.3.12 Effect of Failure
Describe effects of the failure mode (what is the results if a failure occurs).
Include direct effects to the concerned parts or assembled parts (of the subsequent
processes) resulted from the failure mode, and where possible, include possible
effects when those parts are used in Honda products.
3.3.13 Identification
Enter symbols (HS, HA, Q, NH, HR, etc.) specified by Honda, when applicable.
3.3.14 Severity of the effect (S for severity)
In order to quantitatively describe the severity of a failure mode identified in section
3.3.12, rank the degree of effect and enter the corresponding number the larger the
number is more severe the effect is. Determine severity based on the degree of
effects to subsequent processes, to Honda, and to the market when a failure mode is
flowed out.

2/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
Criteria for ranking shall be established in reference to the table provided below.
Justification for the evaluation criteria shall be provided as required in section 3.3.24.
The ranking is often expressed on a scale of 0 to 10. Other measurement scales
such as 1-4 scale (linear scale: 1, 2, 3, and 4, or exponential scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, etc.)
are also acceptable, as long as the employed scale is effective for evaluation and
severity is well-expressed.
Ranking Severity Ranking on a 1-10 Scale (example)
 Failure mode of parts that impairs the safety of Honda
10 products and leads to a fatal accident and/or involves a
Extremely violation of regulatory requirements (without predictability)
Severe  Failure mode of parts that impairs the safety of Honda
9 products and leads to a fatal accident and/or a violation of
regulatory requirements (with predictability).
 Failure mode of parts that causes loss or deficiency of primary
8 performance, function, or structure of Honda products.
 Failure mode that leads to a serious accident.
 Failure mode of parts that may cause loss or deficiency of
primary performance, function, or structure of Honda
7 Severe
products.
 Failure mode that may lead to a serious accident.
 Failure mode of parts that may but may not necessarily cause
6 loss or deficiency of performance, function, or structure of
Honda products.
 Affected Honda products are usable or operable but at a
5
reduced level of performance or function.
 Lead to multitudes of warranty claims against Honda products
4 Moderate with respect to fit and finish, appearance, noise in use or
operation, feeling, etc.
 Lead to warranty claims against Honda products with respect
3 to fit and finish, appearance, noise and feeling in use or
operation, etc.
 Lead to complaints against fit and finish, appearance, noise
2 and feeling when in use or operation, etc. Defect noticed by
Mild limited users.
1  No discernible effect or effect can be ignored.
Ranking Severity Ranking on a 1-4 Scale (example)

 Failure mode of parts that impairs (or may impair) the safety
4 of Honda products, which leads to a fatal accident and/or
involves a violation of regulatory requirements.
 Failure mode of parts that impairs the safety of Honda
3 products and leads to a fatal accident and/or involves a
violation of regulatory requirements (without predictability).
 Failure mode of parts that reduce (or may reduce)
performance level of Honda products. Honda products are
2 usable and operable but at a reduced level of performance or
function with respect to fit and finish, appearance, noise and
feeling in use or operation, etc.
1  No discernible effect or effect can be ignored.

3/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
3.3.15 Cause of the failure mode

List every possible cause assignable to every potential failure mode (conditions for
process malfunction or parts nonconformity to occur and mechanisms of problem
causes to be developed).
3.3.16 Occurrence (O)
Enter the probability of occurrence of the failure mode set forth in section 3.3.15. in
numerical values. The higher the value is, the higher the certainty is.
The probability of occurrence is the likelihood of a failure occurring, not the failure
mode, severity, or probability of detection.
Justification for evaluation criteria shall be provided as required in section 3.3.24.
Ranking criteria shall preferably be quantitative and supported by statistical
evidence.
If it is not practical to use Cpk or percent defective as a statistical basis, use
alternative scales such as quantitative scale or time based scale for lot, batch, etc.,
to set the ranking criteria.
The ranking is often expressed on a scale of 0 to 10. Other measurement scales
such as a 1-4 scale (linear scale: 1, 2, 3, and 4, or exponential scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 8,
etc.) are also acceptable if the employed scale is effective for evaluation and
probability of occurrence is well-expressed.
Occurrence Evaluation Criteria on a 1-10 Scale (example)

on a 1-10 Scale (example)
Raking
Cpk P（%） Percent defective
(estimate)
10 Continual・＜0.33 ≧32 1/2 or more
9 Frequent ≧0.33 ＜32 1/3 or less
8 ≧0.50 ＜13 1/8 or less
7 ≧0.67 ＜ 5 1/20 or less
6 ≧0.83 ＜ 1.2 1/80 or less
5 ≧1.00 ＜ 0.3 1/400 or less
4 ≧1.17 ＜ 0.05 1/2,000 or less
3 ≧1.33 ＜ 0.01 1/15,000 or less
2 Rare・ ≧1.50 ＜ 0.0007 1/150,000 or less
1 Almost ≧1.67 ＜ 0.00006 1/1,500,000 or less
absent
Low
Remote

4/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
Ranking Occurrence Evaluation Criteria on a 1-10 Scale (example)

10 Continual・ More than once a day
Frequently occur
9 Frequent Once every 3 to 4 days
8 Once a week
High incidence rate
7 Once a month
6 Once every 3 months
Moderate incidence rate
5 Semi annually
4 Annually
Low incidence rate
3 Once every 1 to 3 years
2 Once every 3 to 5 years
Low
1 Almost never occurs Less than once every 5
Remote
years
Ranking Criteria for Occurrence on a 1-4 Scale (example)

It occurs consistently or frequently. With high probability,
4
High probability or consistent or frequent occurrence.
3 Moderate probability or occasional occurrence.
2 Low probability, or little occurrence
1 Very little occurrence
3.3.17 Current Process Control

Describe methods of process control, testing, and inspection that are currently in
practice for the purpose of preventing or detecting the failure mode and cause and
mechanism of the failure mode. Such methods include QA devices, error proofing or
inspection processes, preventive maintenance of machines and tools, and the use of
statistical process control techniques such as control charts, etc.,
Improvement of process control will work favorably for the improvement of rate and
possibility of detection.
(e.g. improvement in the rankings of occurrence probability and detection possibility
by use of QA devices, event probability by implementing preventive maintenance or
detection possibility by the use of control charts, etc.) .
3.3.18 Detection Possibility（D）
Enter the probability of detection of a failure mode occurred by the method provided
in section 3.3.17 on a 1 to 10 scale. The higher the value in the ranking, the more
difficult it is to detect a failure mode.
Since detection possibility is the likelihood of detection on the premises that a failure
mode has occurred, occurrence probability has no effect on the detection possibility.
The detection probability describes the probability of a process control to detect
failure when all parts in process might have a failure mode. Monitoring of delivery
quality performance and market warranty claim (containment confirmation) is
effectual for the verification of failure mode delectability.
Prospect of detecting the failure mode before delivery to Honda shall determine the
ranking. Factors such as difficulty level of visual check, tightness of inspection level
including method, frequency, etc. shall be considered.

5/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
The ranking is often expressed on a scale of 0 to 10. Other measurement scale such
as a 1-4 scale (linear scale: 1, 2, 3, and 4, or exponential scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, etc.) is
also acceptable as long as the employed scale is effective for evaluation and
detectability is well-expressed.
Ranking Detection Evaluation Criteria: 1-10 Scale (example)
Impossible  Failure cannot be detected before delivery to Honda.
10
(very difficult)  No process controls available to detect failure.
 Failure is likely to be flowed out to Honda.
9
 Process controls currently in place cannot detect failure.
 Extremely difficult to be detected failure before shipping.
8  Process control currently in place will probably not detect
failure.
 Failure is detectable by periodic sampling inspection.
 Difficult to detect failure by current process control.
7  Failure can be detected by periodic sampling inspection.
 Process controls currently in place have poor chance of
detection of failure.
 Failure can be detected by regularly conducted sampling
6 inspection.
 Process controls currently in place may overlook failure.
 Failure can be detected by 100% final inspection.
5  Process controls currently in place may detect failure.
(e.g. trends monitored using statistical process control,
Moderate etc.)
chance of
detection  Failure can be detected in the subsequent process.
4  Process controls currently in place can detect failure. (e.g.
trends monitored using statistical process control in
addition to the 100% inspection, etc.)
 Failure can be detected in the subsequent process.
3  Process controls currently in place can detect failure
(monitor trends by using statistical process control in
addition to 100% inspection, etc.).
 Failure can be detected within the process.
2  Process control such as QA devices, etc. is in place for
100% inspection with automatic error detection feature.
 Can be detected within the process. Detection is easy and
no attention is required.
Certain
1  Process control system such as QA device, etc. is in place
( easy)
for 100% inspection with automatic error detection and
removal features.
Ranking Detection Evaluation Criteria : 1-10 Scale (example)

4 Not detectable
3 Less likely to be detected or overlooked).
2 Likely to be detected.
1 Almost certain to be detected.

6/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
3.3.19 Risk Priority Number（RPN）

Enter the value obtained by multiplying severity (S), occurrence (O), and detection
(D) ranking numbers together.
［Risk priority number (RPN) ＝Severity (S)× Occurrence (O)× Detection (D) ］
The RPN is for the risk evaluation, which is to rank order of concerns in the process.
Risk of failure modes shall be evaluated in consideration of three aspects, severity,
occurrence, detection, and priority of corrective actions shall be determined
accordingly.
The RPN is a quantitative measure, which determines the priority for corrective
actions to be taken to a failure mode. The higher the RPN, the higher the priority for
corrective action, since more attention to the particular manufacturing process of the
product is required
Criteria of prioritizing corrective actions based on RPN shall be established in
reference to the table provided below.
Ranking RPN Evaluation Criteria : 1-10 Scale (example)
RPN = S×O×D
RPN Measures
1000 Top priority  Top priority.
436 ～ 1000
 Immediate measures required.
 High priority.
130 ～ 435
 Implement measures.
 Moderate priority.
27 ～ 129  Monitor the occurrence of a failure mode
and implement measures accordingly.
 Low priority.
8 ～ 26  Implement measures where time and
resources allow.
 Accept as a remaining risk.
1 Least priority 1 ～ 7
 No further measures required.
Ranking RPN Evaluation Criteria : 1-4 Scale (example)

RPN = S×O×D RPN Measures
12 ～ 64 12 or more  (Immediate) measures required.
 Monitor the occurrence of a failure
6 ～ 9 6 or more mode and implement measures
accordingly
1 ～ 4 6 or less  No further measures required.
3.3.20 Action Plan and Target Implementation Date

Enter action plan and target date of completion for the anticipated failure mode.
Implement an action plan for failure mode by priority. Higher the risk priority number
(RPN) is, sooner the measures shall be taken.
Measures such as inspection, etc., may be employed as interim. Permanent
measures including changes to design and/or manufacturing process shall be
implemented in order for the root cause of a failure mode to be eliminated.
If RPNs are the same, prioritize the one of greater severity, and contemplate to
reduce the rate of occurrence by taking measures.

7/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
3.3.21 Action Taken

Record measures that have been implemented such as control method change,
installation of inspection equipment, etc.
If follow-up activities were conducted in addition to the original plan, keep a record of
such activities as well. Especially, if any changes were made to design as part of
measures, process FMEA shall be implemented continuously.
The FMEA is a living document and should always reflect the latest design level as
well as the latest relevant actions.
3.3.22 Effective Date of Measure and Responsible Person
Enter target completion date for measures and person in charge of the measures.
3.3.23 Verification of Actions Taken
Reassess the severity (S), occurrence (O), detection (D) and risk priority number
(PRN) rankings of each failure mode after having implemented the planned actions.
Examine if further analysis and countermeasure is necessary.
In order to validate that further measures for remaining risks are not necessary
where measures are deemed to be completed or will not be implemented, evaluation
criteria shall be established as required in section 4.3.24.
3.3.24 Criteria
Define evaluation criteria for each of the risk evaluation aspects, such as severity (S),
occurrence (O), detection (D), and risk priority number (PRN), and the tolerance
level for risks remaining.
1 Process FMEA worksheet
order.

8/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
6 Forms
6.1 Process FMEA worksheet
Process FMEA Worksheet For Honda use only Revision No. Description of revision Date of date est./revision Approved by Confirmed by Prepared by
Model/Type/Model Year： Process FMEA control no.： 00 Establishment

Honda part no. ： Supplier part number：
Honda part name ： Supplier part name： Process FMEA was carried out by (dept or person) ：
Supplier name ： Supplier code：
Supplier address (factory location) ：
Process FMEA was carried out by (dept or person) ：
※Identification： if parts are of Honda specified parts, enter a code (HS, HA, Q, NH, HR, etc.) .
※※Completion confirmation ：with consideration given to acceptance level of residual risks, confirm completion of a Process FMEA (no further measures required), and enter the name of the person confirmed and the date of confirmation.
Scope of risk evaluation Risk evaluation Countermeasure ( risk minimizing activities) Verification of C/M (re-evaluate risks)
Function of the Influence if a failure mode occurs Identify- Seriou Occurrence Current process control Detection Risk C/M C/M Occurrence Detection Risk Completion
Cause of failure mode C/M carried out PIC of Seriousness
No. Process name process Failure mode To To Honda cation sness rate method probability priority Proposed C/M date application rate probability priority no. confirmatio
※ (Occurrence mechanism) (O) (including follow-ups) CM (S)
(what does this parts/components products (S) (prevention/detection of (D) （RPN） (target) date (O) (D) (RPN) n
Seriousness (S) Occurrence (O) Detection probability (D) Risk priority number (RPN) ［RPN = S×O×D］
Rank Evaluation criteria Rank Evaluation criteria Rank Evaluation criteria RPN Response
10 10 10
9 9 9
8 8 8
7 7 7
6 6 6
5 5 5
4 4 4
3 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
Page 　　　　　　 of 　　　　　　　.

9/10
5-5 Process FMEA
July 1, 2014
6.2 Process FMEA Worksheet (Entry procedure) Complete in reference to section 3.3 above.
Process FMEA Worksheet For Honda use only Revision No. Description of revision Date of date est./revision Approved by Confirmed by Prepared by
Model/Type/Model Year： 3.3.2 Process FMEA control no.：

3.3.7 00 Establishment
Honda part no. ： Supplier part number：
Honda part name ： 3.3.3 （3.3.3） Process FMEA was carried out by (dept or person) ：
Supplier part name：
3.3.5 3.3.6
Supplier name ： Supplier code： 3.3.4
3.3.4
Supplier address (factory location) ：
Process FMEA was carried out by (dept or person) ： 3.3.8 3.3.8
※Identification： if parts are of Honda specified parts, enter a code (HS, HA, Q, NH, HR, etc.) .
※※Completion confirmation ：with consideration given to acceptance level of residual risks, confirm completion of a Process FMEA (no further measures required), and enter the name of the person confirmed and the date of confirmation.
Scope of risk evaluation Risk evaluation Countermeasure ( risk minimizing activities) Verification of C/M (re-evaluate risks)
Function of the Influence if a failure mode occurs Identify- Seriou Occurrence Current process control Detection Risk C/M C/M Occurrence Detection Risk Completion
Cause of failure mode C/M carried out PIC of Seriousness
No. Process name process Failure mode To To Honda cation sness rate method probability priority Proposed C/M date application rate probability priority no. confirmatio
※ (Occurrence mechanism) (O) (including follow-ups) CM (S)
(what does this parts/components products (S) (prevention/detection of (D) （RPN） (target) date (O) (D) (RPN) n
3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 3.3.12 3.3.13 3.3.14 3.3.15 3.3.16 3.3.17 3.3.18 3.3.19 3.3.20 3.3.21 3.3.22 3.3.23
Seriousness (S) Occurrence (O) Detection probability (D) Risk priority number (RPN) ［RPN = S×O×D］
Rank Evaluation criteria Rank Evaluation criteria Rank Evaluation criteria RPN Response
10 10 10
9 9 9
8 8 8
7 7 7
6 6 6
5
3.3.24 5
3.3.24 5
3.3.24 3.3.24
4
3 （3.3.14）
4
3 （3.3.16）
4
3 （3.3.18）（3.3.19）
2 2 2
1 1 1
Page 　　　　　　 of 　　　　　　　.

10/10
July 1, 2014
6 Supplement
Terms Definitions
Approved actual part
A part sample with which color was agreed with Honda.
sample
Component parts constituting an automatic speed change
A
Automatic transmission, mechanism, such as AT (automatic transmission), CVT
etc. (continuously variable transmission), 4WD (4-wheel drive), MCU
(moment control unit), etc., and parts assembled to them.
A process of establishing the relationship between the value
Calibration measured by the measuring device and its true value with
standards and reference materials to correct deviations.
A part that was recovered from a marketed product as a possible
Call-in part problem part and collected from the market by Honda for
analysis of causes.
All changes including unexpected changes, such as a blackout,
Change point in addition to a planned change to a part specification and
manufacturing plan.
A ranking of contaminants control parts such as automatic
Cleanliness rank transmission, etc. in the order of influence of contamination on
the function of the automatic transmission, etc.
Color Color of part exterior
Color application plate Color master set forth in HES Z 0013.
Component parts (Sub-) parts that constitute the parts provided by supplier.
Composite quality A quality characteristic that will be demonstrated or explicated by
C
characteristics a combination of supply parts and manufacturing parts.
Concession is the act of using raw materials, parts, etc. that do
not conform to specified requirements in limited quantities or for
a certain time period.
Concession
However, those which affect product safety, prevention of
environmental pollution, and/or regulatory compliance of
products shall be exempt from the scope of concession.
Contaminants Foreign matter such as grain, grit, chip, burr, dirt, dust, etc.
A ranking of contaminants control parts, which are not included in
Control priority ranking the definition of automatic transmission, etc., by safety, function
and performance.
An action designated to prevent recurrence of nonconformity,
Corrective action
once it has occurred.
An action to be taken by a supplier to request Honda for a
Countermeasure
change to the drawings (specifications, etc., included) by using
request
“Countermeasure Request [Countermeasure Request Form]”.
A course of action by the quality assurance representative,
Declaration of facility quality representative, or responsible person who was
compliance with appointed and entrusted by the quality assurance person of a
regulatory requirements supplier to verify that the specifications of parts designed by the
supplier comply with regulatory requirements.
Honda (including destinations of service parts and KD parts) or
Delivery destination
D designated suppliers to which supply parts are delivered.
Delivery location A destination of delivery specified on the delivery slip.
A group of parts which are delivered to Honda or a location
Delivery lot specified by Honda in a batch, corresponding to the”delivery
slip”.
A state of parts in a container or on a cart to be shipped out from
Delivery packaging
a supplier to a manufacturing plant of Honda.

1/6
July 1, 2014
Terms Definitions
Data obtained by counting and it cannot be divided into units
Discrete value
smaller than one.
A system of products or manufacturing processes that prevents
Error proofing
nonconforming products from being manufactured.
E An act of extending the warranty period, submitting a notice to
Extended warranty the competent authorities, and implement improvement
measures.
A tool consists of the following five steps for problem solving.
Also referred to as 5P.
“ investigation and comprehension of the facts”
5 Principals for Problem “ identification of causes (why-why analysis) ”
Solving
F “ appropriate measures”
“ verification of the effects of measures”
“ feedback to upstream sources”
50 % Tolerance limit Setting up of inspection standard tolerance at 50 percent of the
band tolerance specified on drawings.
Uneven pattern of part surface by the arrangement of particulate
Grain
constituents.
A supplier specified by Honda who performs grain embossing on
Grain process supplier
the part mold.
G Group or grouping is the act of collection of data into units. In
general, a group is a set of data collected through random
Group sampling per unit such as day, shit or batch, etc.
* batch: a set of material (conditions) processed in a single
production process.
When necessary, after consulting with the supplier, Honda will
H Honda-owned property lend machines, dies, tools and jigs, etc. needed to manufacture
parts, etc.
Important quality
Important quality characteristics set forth in HES A 3051.
characteristics
Important safety parts Important safety parts set forth in HES A 3050.
An action taken by Honda to implement improvement measures
by submitting a notice to the competent authorities in
accordance with Article 9 (Improvement Campaign) of Circular
Improvement campaign
Notice "Handling Procedure for Notification, etc. of Recall"
(Jishin No.1530 of December 1, 1994, hereinafter referred to as
I "Circular Notice").
Parts of the initial lot released from an originating section to its
next section or of the initial lot released from a supplier to Honda,
Initial production parts
to which the supplier applied changes in specification,
(IPP)
manufacturing method, etc. This applies to parts ordered for
mass production use only.
Presentation to Honda of self-controlled IPP, etc. before mass
IPP presentation production start to confirm quality compliance, process-ability,
assemble-ability, etc.
In the case where there are two or more manufacturing lot
K Key process forming processes, a representative process for lot retrieval in
those manufacturing lot forming processes.
A section of Honda, which acts as a planning center for the
Lead section of Honda Quality Assurance Visit and issues individual audit plans to notify
suppliers of the audit.
L A sample of parts which demonstrates quality limits for
Limit sample
conformance or nonconformance.
Parts returned from Honda by the unit of delivery lot due to
Lot-out parts
nonconformity, such as not satisfying specifications.

2/6
July 1, 2014
Terms Definitions
Manufacturing A management plan to monitor progress of the activities
Management Plan specified in the Stage Management.
A record of production corresponding to the identification of a
Manufacturing history manufacturing lot, which includes the date and amount of
manufacture, and results of inspection.
A group of parts manufactured or deemed manufactured under
Manufacturing lot
the same condition.
Control method that forms a manufacturing lot and subsequently
Manufacturing lot control control traceability of parts by identifying such lot and its
manufacturing history.
Manufacturing process for which manufacturing lot shall be
Manufacturing lot formed and identified in order to track and control traceability of
forming process parts, which is determined by quality characteristic priority,
process layout, equipment, process capability, etc.
A declaration by the quality assurance representative, facility
M Mass Production quality representative, or deputy of a supplier stating that the
Transition Declaration requirements prescribed by Honda for quality and mass
productivity of parts have been satisfied.
A general term for measuring instruments (gauge, measuring
instrument, standard, etc.), testing device, testers, analytical
equipments, etc., including related software of computer
Measuring equipment systems.
For definitions of terms used for measuring instruments, testers,
analytical equipment, etc., refer to JIS Z 8103 “Glossary of
terms used in measurement”.
Equipment to use to “monitoring: the observation of a system
(all or part) to verify proper performance and detect improper
performance. Actual observation is made by measuring one or
Monitoring device
more variants of the system, and subsequent comparison of the
value obtained from such measurements with the specified
value.” in 24103, section 4.1 of JIS B0155.
Parts that do not conform to drawings (specifications included) or
N Nonconforming parts
limit samples.
A generic term for documents to provide operators with
directions for work sequences, set-up condition, etc. in order for
each of the fabrication, assembly, inspection, equipment
maintenance, transportation, and administrative processing, etc.
Operation Control
to be controlled per process, product, operation, etc.
Documents
Documents such as operation standards, condition control
tables, specifications, signs or displays showing photographs or
O illustrations to caution, and check/inspection standards for
inspecting equipment are included.
A set of documents that describe requirements and procedures
to be followed such as illustrations of work, work sequences, jigs
and tools, quality characteristics and standards, operation key
Operation standard
points, inspection methods, parts to be used, facilities, actions to
be taken when abnormality occurs, and other cautions (it is
referred to as “ work instruction” in ISO/TS”).
Inspection Criteria [System/Device and Parts], which set forth
Parts Inspection Criteria acceptance criteria to be applied to inspection of individual
constituent parts of a product.
P
Presentation to Honda of specification change IPP before mass
Prior confirmation production start (before implementing the change) to confirm
compliance with specification change.

3/6
July 1, 2014
Terms Definitions
The part classification number is given to show what model the
part is made for, or what model the part is exclusively for.
※For DWG.No. of drawing title block (Boxed space on the
Part classification NO bottom)
Main No. Part Type No. Suppiementary No.

Classification No. Prototype Code
A condition characterized by discrepancy between an ideal state

Problem
and an actual state.
The ability to achieve quality requirements of a process in a
Process capability
controlled state.
A quantified measure of process capability, and “ a value
calculated by dividing the specification range by 6 σ for a
certain characteristic”
Process capability Index ”Process in a controlled state” in the definition above for
process capability means that the characteristic value is normally
distributed, and this forms the basis of the process capability
index.
Process FMEA
A format used to implement process FMEA and to record results.
worksheet
Control items for the set up condition and its standards and/or
Production Conditions criteria necessary to ensure quality required for respective
manufacturing processes.
Parts that are used to validate possible specification changes
Production prototype
during mass production stage prior to implementing such
parts
changes.
All component parts and materials that a supplier procures from
Purchased parts its sub-suppliers in order to produce products to be delivered to
Honda.
Property and performance subject to quality evaluation, and
standards and criteria to control them.
The IPP for which quality improvement was implemented by
supplier in accordance with the “Rejection Countermeasure
Quality improvement
Request,” “Market Quality Information
Q IPP
[Analysis/Countermeasure Request],” , “Honda Trouble Report”
or other forms issued by Honda.
Quality Records are the all records set forth in the “Control of
Quality records Records" section of each article of this SQM, regardless of form
or medium ( paper, electronic, magnetic and other media)
An act of implementing improvement measures by submitting a
notice to the competent authorities in accordance with
Paragraph 3 of Article 63 (Report, etc. of Corrective Action) of
Recall Road Vehicles Act (Law No.185 of 1951).
This includes the implementation of equivalent actions in foreign
countries in accordance with the laws and regulations of those
countries.
R A general term for market action, which includes recall,
Recall, etc. improvement campaign, service campaign and extended
warranty.
A material used for inspecting instrumental errors of equipment
(weight, block gauge, reference solution, etc.), whose
Reference material
physical/chemical amount is certified (actually measured values
are indicated) based on the material examination results.
An inspection of equipment for problems with the term and
Regular check
extent specified.

4/6
July 1, 2014
Terms Definitions
Regular inspection Periodic inspection of equipment for appearance and function.
The act of preserving less-frequently-used documents (including
electronic medium) in a location such as archive and stockroom
Retention
outside the worksite in a manner that allows prompt retrieval
when needed.
A pre-use check of equipment for appearance and function
Routine check
performed by the using department of the applicable equipment.
The IPP falling under the items other than specification change
IPP or quality improvement IPP, which is self-controlled by
Self-controlled IPP
supplier through confirming and recording quality,
process-ability, assemble-ability, etc. after changes.
An act of implementing improvement measures by submitting a
Service campaign notice to the competent authorities in accordance with Article 10
(Implementation of Service Campaign) of Circular Notice.
A change to the entry in the field for notating changes to
Specification change component parts in the product drawing or specification change
notice.
The IPP to which specification change was implemented by
Specification change supplier in accordance with the “ Application Change
IPP
Instruction” issued by Honda.
A management method that controls supplier activities on a
step-by-step basis. The processes of pre-production and mass
production are divided into 6 stages from stage I to stage VI.
Main activity to be completed at each stage is described below.
Stage Ⅰ：Obtain product requirements from Honda. (Stage I will
be omitted hereafter since this stage consists of activities prior to
the Pre-production.)
Stage Management Stage Ⅱ：：Formulate a manufacture management plan.
Stage Ⅲ：Promote activities required based on the manufacture
management plan.
S Stage Ⅳ：Verify quality maturation status.
Stage Ⅴ：Confirm the prospect of transition to mass production
and declare completion of production preparation.
Stage Ⅵ：Mass production.
The act of organizing frequently-used documents in a manner
Storage
that allows fast retrieval during daily business operations.
One of the numeric values which correspond to the distribution of
statistical values and random variables, and expressed by σ.
Standard deviation
6 σ represents the value of σ (standard deviation) multiplied by
six times.
A service provider whom a supplier purchases parts from and
Sub-Supplier outsources services to such as fabrication, testing, etc., and
( tier 2 and beyond) including those who beyond the first service provider, it is
collectively referred to as sub-suppliers.
Supplier A first tier supplier to Honda who receives orders for parts
(tier 1supplier) directly from Honda.
A drawing of parts drawn and issued by a supplier, which Honda
had outsourced the design, development, and manufacturing to,
Supplier drawing in accordance with the basic requirements of preliminary
specifications provided by Honda, or a “parts supplier’s drawing”
which referred to as a supplier’s drawing.
A member who was selected by a supplier from its own
Supplier in-house visitor employees and leads assessment during a Quality Assurance
Visit (supplier quality audit).

5/6
July 1, 2014
Terms Definitions
A company which has a direct contract with Honda, and provides
Supply part supplier
supply parts to another company designated by Honda.
A supplier who uses supply parts as components in the
Supply part user
manufacture of parts to Honda.
Component parts provided to a supplier by Honda to
manufacture parts to be delivered to Honda. This applies when
Supply parts Honda purchases a part from a supplier (supply parts supplier)
and/or manufactures a part, which is provided to another
supplier (user) for a fee to manufacture parts delivered to Honda.
Total quality Quality characteristics of the final products completed by a
characteristics supply part user.
T
The ability to trace the history, application or location of a product
Traceability
or servicing by record identification.
Variable (continuous Data obtained by measurement. Unit of measure can be made
V
data) precise depending on the measuring device.

6/6
July 1, 2014

Saitama area Suzuka area
Delivery
Regional Operations（Japan） Regional Operations（Japan） Automobile Operations
Automobile Production
Automobile Production Automobile Production Drivetrain Business Unit
Saitama Factory Suzuka Factory Transmission Factory
Contact Automobile (Frame) Automobile (Powertrain) Automobile (Frame) Automobile (Powertrain) Automobile (Drivetrain)
Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ
Raw Material Strategy BL Raw Material Strategy BL Raw Material Strategy BL Raw Material Strategy BL Raw Material Strategy BL
Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New
Model Office Model Office Model Office Model Office Model Office
M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL
Purchasing- Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div
Cost Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL
Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL
Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL
Regional Operations（Japan） Regional Operations（Japan） Regional Operations（Japan） Regional Operations（Japan） Regional Operations（Japan）
Purchasing Div Purchasing Div Purchasing Div Purchasing Div Purchasing Div
Saitama Purchasing BL Saitama Purchasing BL Suzuka Purchasing BL Suzuka Purchasing BL Suzuka Purchasing BL
Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit
Purchasing Operations
Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div
Purchasing-Planning
QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL
Purchasing Operations Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit
Enforcement charge Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div
section Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL
Purchasing Supervisory Unit Engine Plant Purchasing Supervisory Unit Vehicle Assurance Office Purchasing Supervisory Unit
Purchasing Technical Div Power Train Quality BL Purchasing Technical Div Engine Quality Dept Purchasing Technical Div
Body Parts Engineering BL Powertrain Production Supervisory Unit Body Parts Engineering BL Powertrain Production Supervisory Unit Body Parts Engineering BL
New model Functional Parts Engineering BL Powertrain Strategy Planning Divison Functional Parts Engineering BL Powertrain Strategy Planning Divison Functional Parts Engineering BL
preparation Automobile Production, Purchasing Division Powertrain New-Model Promotion BL Automobile Production, Purchasing Division Powertrain New-Model Promotion BL Automobile Production, Purchasing Division
section Body Parts QD BL Body Parts QD BL Body Parts QD BL
Functional Parts QD BL Functional Parts QD BL Functional Parts QD BL
Vehicle Assurance Office Suzuka Plant
Frame Parts Quality BL Transmission Quality Dept
Receiving Vehicle Assurance Office Engine Plant Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Suzuka Plant
quality Parts Quality Dept Power Train Quality BL Frame Parts Quality BL Engine Quality Dept Transmission Quality Dept
Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Suzuka Plant
Procurement Dept Procurement Dept Purchasing Dept Purchasing Dept Transmission Quality Dept
Frame Parts Quality BL Engine Quality Dept Automobile Production
Procurement
Suzuka Factory
Vehicle Assurance Office
Purchasing Dept
Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Suzuka Plant
Material Service　Dept Material Service　Dept Material Service Dept Material Service Dept Transmission Control BL
Material
Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit
service Production Parts Logistics Division Production Parts Logistics Division Production Parts Logistics Division Production Parts Logistics Division Production Parts Logistics Division
Domestic Parts Distribution Dept( Saitama ) Domestic Parts Distribution Dept( Saitama ) Domestic Parts Distribution Dept( Suzuka ) Domestic Parts Distribution Dept( Suzuka ) Domestic Parts Distribution Dept( Suzuka )
Production Supervisory Unit Engine Plant Vehicle Assurance Office Vehicle Assurance Office Automobile Production
Saitama Planning and Administration Office Power Train Quality BL Vehicle Assurance Control Dept Vehicle Assurance Control Dept Suzuka Factory
Products Engineering Dept Vehicle Assurance Office
Market quality Vehicle Assurance Control Dept
Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Honda R&D Co.,Ltd.
TAC TAC TAC TAC TAC
Analysis Dept Analysis Dept Analysis Dept Analysis Dept Analysis Dept

1/2
July 1, 2014
Kumamoto area Hamamatsu area Tochigi area

Delivery
Automobile Operations Automobile Operations
Motorcycle Operations Power Product Operations Power Product Operations Automobile Production
Automobile Production Drivetrain Business Unit
Kumamoto Factory Power Product Plant Outboard Engine Plant
Drivetrain Business Unit Powertrain Unit Factory
Contact Automobile Motorcycle Power Product Automobile Power Product Automobile
Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Purchasing Division Power Product Operations Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ Power Product Operations Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing Div-Ⅰ
Raw Material Strategy BL Purchasing -1BL Purchasing Planning Office Raw Material Strategy BL Purchasing Planning Office Raw Material Strategy BL
Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New Purchasing -2BL No.1 Dept Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New No.1 Dept Purchasing Supervisory Unit, Purchasing New
Model Office No.2 Dept Model Office No.2 Dept Model Office
Purchasing-
M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL M.R.O. BL
Cost
Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div Automobile Production Purchasing Div
Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL Stamping & Plastic Parts Cost BL
Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL Functional Parts Cost BL
Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL Powertrain & Drive System Parts Cost BL
Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit
Purchasing Operations
Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div
Purchasing-Planning
QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL QD Affairs BL
Purchasing Operations Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit Purchasing Supervisory Unit
Enforcement charge Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div Purchasing Technical Div
section Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL Production Improvement BL
Purchasing Division Purchasing Division Power Product Quality Department Production Operation Office Quality Control Dept Quality Control Office
New model Procurement Dept Procurement Dept Motorcycle Operations Venders Procurement Dept Drivetrain Business Unit Quality Dept
preparation Powertrain Production Supervisory Unit Kumamoto Factory Powertrain Production Supervisory Unit Transmission Factory Powertrain Production Supervisory Unit
section Powertrain Strategy Planning Divison Vehicle Plant Purchasing Division Powertrain Strategy Planning Divison Production Operation Office Powertrain Strategy Planning Divison
Powertrain New-Model Promotion BL Procurement Dept Procurement Dept Powertrain New-Model Promotion BL Procurement Dept Powertrain New-Model Promotion BL
Receiving Vehicle Plant Vehicle Plant Power Product Quality Department Hamamatsu Plant Quality Control Dept Quality Control Office
quality Procurement Dept Procurement Dept Quality Dept Quality Dept
Purchasing Division Purchasing Division Motorcycle Operations Kumamoto Factory Production Operation Office Drivetrain Business Unit Transmission Factory Production Operation Office
Procurement Procurement Dept Procurement Dept Purchasing Division Venders Procurement Dept Production Operation Office Procurement Dept
Procurement Dept Venders Procurement Dept
Powertrain Plant Powertrain Plant Power Product Dept Hamamatsu Plant Manufacturing　Mo Powertrain Part Plant
Material Powertrain Mgt Dept Powertrain Mgt Dept Material Service Dept Powertrain Part Procurement Warranty
service Vehicle Plant Control Dept
Vehicle Assembly Management Dept
Quality Control Office Power Product Quality Department Quality Control Office Quality Control Dept Quality Control Office
Total Quality Control BL Hamamatsu Product Engineering Dept Quality Dept
Motorcycle Operations Power Product Operations
Market quality
Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Quality Assurance Division Quality Assurance Division Honda R&D Co.,Ltd. Power Product Operations Honda R&D Co.,Ltd.
TAC Qlty Analysis Office Power Product Market Quality Contorl TAC Quality Assurance Division TAC
Analysis Dept Dept Analysis Dept Outboard Engine Market Quality Dept Analysis Dept
※ In the case of KD parts, each region's Production Parts Logistics Section is the contact point for logistics quality. Each region's Product Parts Logistics Section is as follows:
Saitama area： Automobile Operations, Automobile Production Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit, Production Parts Logistics Division, International Parts Exchange Dept.(Saitama)
Suzuka area： Automobile Operations, Automobile Production Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit, Production Parts Logistics Division, International Parts Exchange Dept.(Suzuka)
Hamamatsu area： Automobile Operations, Automobile Production Supply Chain Management Supervisory Unit, Production Parts Logistics Division, International Parts Exchange Dept.(Hamamatsu)
Kumamoto area： Motorcycle Operations Kumamoto Factory Vehicle Plant Logistics Department
Power Product Operations Power Product Plant Power Product Department
※In the case of service parts, Japan Regional Operations, Spare Parts Division, and Quality Control Department are the contact points for receipt quality.
※The Honda Contact Conversion Table contains information describing Honda's contact sections for general parts. Please note that there are some exceptions for materials, coatings and brake fluids.

2/2
July 1, 2014
Transaction flow chart of the proposal for SQM revision
Supplier Honda
Contact
IMPACTⅢ or e-mail
Problem in SQM operation Handling inquiry Purchasing
Technical
Division
Sturdy countermeasure
Proposal for SQM Revision

Proposal for
SQM Revision
Approval of quality
assurance representative
Proposal for
SQM Revision
IMPACTⅢ or e-mail Purchasing

Receive and confirm
Application content of proposal Technical
Proposal for Division
SQM Revision
N
Judgement
for adoption
To supplier
IMPACTⅢ or e-mail Y
Purchasing
Confirm Notice
Technical
Proposal for Division
SQM Revision
Confirm and break Purchasing

down Issue SQM revision
Technical
Division
Maintain SQM
Note: Send proposal for SQM revision

For IMPACT Ⅲ: Send through “Contact” of IMPACT Ⅲ.
For e-mails: Send from sqm_support@honda.co.jp

1/2
July 1, 2014
Entry procedure for the proposal of SQM revision

Entry procedure
〔Proposal for SQM revision〕
Please complete the form below and send it to the PIC of SQM in Honda
Quality assurance
SQM heading / term Company name Person prepared Date of issue
representative
① ② ③ ④ ⑤
Reason ① : Identify the part of SQM proposed for revision.

⑥ (e.g. 3-2-1 Process Quality Control Table 3.3.3)
② : Enter the name of your company.
③ : Quality assurance representative sign here for approval
④ : Enter the name of person prepared the proposal.
⑤ : Enter the date of submission to Honda.
Current writing ⑥ : Clarify reason why revision is needed.
⑦ : Enter original text.
⑦
⑧ : Enter proposal to correct the problem.
※If there is any attachment for ⑥,⑦ and ⑧, Enter「See attachment」
Proposal content for SQM revision / Comment
Response from Honda
Date received PIC Author of response Date replied

Column for Honda
Deadline for the retention of original: YYYY/DD/MM

2/2
6-4 Master List
July 1, 2014
6-4 Master List
Control Date of
Document Title Description
Number approval
Content 2014/7/1 Revised for SQM revision.
1 Preface 2014/7/1 Revised to reflect organizational changes.
1-1 Structure of SQM 2008/10/1 Formulated as the first issue.
1-2 Production Process Image 2008/10/1 Formulated as the first issue.
1-3 SQM Outline 2013/02/1 Revised for correct wordings.
Revised to align with revisions to related documents
2-1 Important Safety Parts 2014/7/1 as well as revisions to important quality characteristics
and requirements regarding inspection process ability.
Regulatory Compliance Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
2-2 2014/7/1
Certification Materials.”
Designation of Quality Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
2-3 2014/7/1
Representative Materials.”
Sub-Supplier Quality
2-4 2014/7/1 and other entries in SQM text regarding quality
Assurance
assurance of secondary suppliers.
Control of Honda-Owned Revised to align with revisions to related documents
2-5 2014/7/1
Property and revisions to definitions of terminology.
Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
2-6 Control of Supply Parts 2014/7/1
Materials.”
2-7 Supplier Quality Evaluation 2014/7/1
and GQI application.
2-7-1 Delivery Quality Evaluation 2014/7/1
and GQI application.
Revised for correct Reference Materials and the
2-7-2 Supplier Quality Audit 2014/7/1
change of organization.
2-8 Contaminants Control 2014/7/1
Materials.”
2-9 Control of Quality Records 2014/7/1
Materials.”
3-1 Stage Management 2014/7/1
Materials.”
3-2 Process Design 2014/7/1
and requirements related to the paragraph mentioned.
Process Quality Control Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-2-1 2014/7/1
Table Materials.”
3-3 Delivery Packaging 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Countermeasure at Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-4 2014/7/1
Pre-production Stage Materials.”
3-5-1 Inspection Criteria for Parts 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Preparation of Limit Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-5-2 2014/7/1
Samples Materials.”
3-5-3 Grain and Color Adjustment 2014/7/1
Materials.”

1/2
6-4 Master List
July 1, 2014
Control Date of
Document Title Description
Number approval
Control of Monitoring and Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-6 2014/7/1
Measuring Devices Materials.”
Operation Control Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-7 2014/7/1
Documents Materials.”
3-8 Delivery of Parts 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Transition to Mass Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
3-9 2014/7/1
Production Materials.”
3-9-1 Validity Testing 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Early Mass Production
4-1 2013/02/1 Revised for correct wordings.
Quality Control
Mass Production Quality Revised for the change of record title and retention
4-2 2010/10/1
Control period.
Identification and Revised to align with corrections to “Reference
4-3 2014/7/1
Traceability Materials.”
4-4 Change Point Control 2014/7/1
and GIPP application.
4-5 Corrective Action Report 2014/7/1 as well as revisions to expressions and statements
regarding quality assurance of secondary suppliers.
4-5-1 Delivery Quality Problem 2014/7/1
Materials.”
4-5-2 Market Quality Problem 2014/7/1 and the deletion of requirements due to changes in
requirements.
4-6 Specification Change 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Countermeasure Request
4-6-1 2014/7/1 Revised for the changes made in the entry procedure.
Form
5-1 Process Capability 2008/10/1 Formulated as the first issue.
5-2 Error Proofing 2008/10/1 Formulated as the first issue.
5-3 Control Chart 2013/02/1 Revised for correcting mistakes.
5 Principals for Problem
5-4 2008/10/1 Formulated as the first issue.
Solving
5-5 Process FMEA 2014/7/1
Materials.”
Glossary of Terms and
6-1 2014/7/1 Revised for definition in “Honda-owned property”.
Definitions.
Honda Contacts Conversion
6-2 2014/7/1 Revised to reflect organizational changes.
Table
6-3 Proposal for SQM Revision 2014/7/1 Revised to reflect organizational changes.
6-4 Master List 2014/7/1 Revised for SQM revision.

2/2

SQM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SQM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Supplier Quality Manual

Revise No. Revise Date Effective Date

03 1 Jul 2014 1 Apr 2015

Saichon S. Narith P. Adul K. Suzuki Y. Sanbonmatsu T. Murai H.

Control Document 20 year in electronic file QMPFR-S0804-001 Rev.00

This English translation is for reference purposes

4 Mass Production Stage

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

1-1 Structure of SQM

3-1 Stage Management

3-5 Quality Standards -2 Preparation of Limit Samples

4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control

Mass Production Stage

4-3 Identification and Traceability

4-6 Specification Change -1 Countermeasure Request Form

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

1-2 Production Process Image

3-1 Stage Management

3-2 Process Design -1 Process Quality Control Table

3-3 Delivery Packaging 4-1 Early Mass Production Quality Control

3-4 C/M at Preproduction Stage 4-2 Mass Production Quality Control

3-8 Delivery of Parts

Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

1-3 SQM Outline

No. Document Title Overview

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

No. Document Title Overview

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

No. Document Title Overview

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

No. Document Title Overview

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

No. Document Title Overview

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

2-1 Important Safety Parts

No. Term Definition

3.2 Implementation of special control

Process Quality Control Table】and 【SQM 3-7 Operation Control Documents】)

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

3.2.4 Assurance of process capability

【SQM 5-1 process function】 to carry out process function verification.

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

2-2 Regulatory Compliance Certification

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

3.1.4 Verification of Management for Regulatory Compliance

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

2-3 Designation of Quality Representative

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

Designate Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Purchase of Parts

Register Quality Assurance Purchasing

If any changes needed

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

Quality Assurance Representative

Facility Name Title Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address C M S K CS T

Quality Assurance System

Honda Motor Co., ltd.

6.2 Quality Assurance Representative Notification Form (Entry procedure)

Quality Assurance Representative

Facility Name Title Address/Phone/FAX/E-mail address C M S K CS T

Kss Qlty Div. Jiro Kumamoto, Mgr

3-2 Process Design　-1 Process Quality Control Table